Mercedes - CLS 350 CDI - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2012

£9.99

Get your hands on the complete Mercedes factory workshop software

Download now

Check out our popular Mercedes 350 Manuals below:

Mercedes - E 350 Sedan - Workshop Manual - 2010 - 2010

Mercedes - E 350 - Owners Manual - 2014 - 2014

Mercedes - GLK 350 - Owners Manual - 2011 - 2011

Mercedes Mercedes ML 350 Mercedes ML 350 2012 Misc Documents Brochure

See All

Mercedes - E 350 Sedan - Workshop Manual - 2010 - 2010

Mercedes - E 350 - Owners Manual - 2014 - 2014

Mercedes - GLK 350 - Owners Manual - 2011 - 2011

Mercedes Mercedes ML 350 Mercedes ML 350 2012 Misc Documents Brochure

See All

Get your hands on the Complete Mercedes Factory Workshop Software

Download now

9.99

Summary of Content

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability The illustrations in this manual show a lefthand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features Therefore, descriptions may vary from those of your own vehicle. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROwner's Manual Booklet Requipment-dependent supplements Keep printed copies of the documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner. RService i You can get to know the important fea- tures of your vehicle in the interactive Owner's Manual on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung 2185841181Z102 É2185841181Z1027ËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 27 Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 39 Opening and closing ........................... 75 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95 Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 109 Climate control ................................. 123 Driving and parking .......................... 139 On-board computer and displays .... 207 Stowing and features ....................... 271 Maintenance and care ...................... 295 Breakdown assistance ..................... 309 Wheels and tyres .............................. 327 Technical data ................................... 355 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 12 V socket see Socket 4ETS see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 184 4MATIC off-road system ................... 184 A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 232 Function/notes ................................ 63 Important safety notes .................... 63 Warning lamp ................................. 261 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode .................................... 131 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 127 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 220 Display message ............................ 246 Function/notes ............................. 201 Active Driving Assistance package . 201 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 220 Display message ............................ 246 Function/notes ............................. 204 Active light function ......................... 115 Active multicontour seat .................. 100 Active Park Assist Display message ............................ 247 Active Parking Assist Important safety notes .................. 187 Active Service System see ASSYST PLUS ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 68 Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 65 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 240 Function/notes ............................. 116 Adaptive Main-beam Assist Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 223 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 364 Airbags Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 44 Important safety guidelines ............. 42 Kneebag ........................................... 44 Pelvis airbag .................................... 45 Sidebag ............................................ 45 Triggering ......................................... 41 Windowbag ...................................... 46 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Air filter (white display message) .... 243 AIR FLOW ........................................... 128 AIRMATIC Display message ............................ 243 Function/notes ............................. 181 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Glove compartment ....................... 137 Important safety notes .................. 136 Rear ............................................... 137 Setting ........................................... 136 Setting the centre air vents ........... 137 Setting the side air vents ............... 137 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ambient lighting Setting the brightness (on-board computer) ...................................... 223 Setting the colour (on-board computer) ............................................. 223 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension ............................................... 183 Anti-glare film .................................... 293 Anti-lock Braking System see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Aquaplaning ....................................... 164 Ashtray ............................................... 282 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 218 Index ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 300 Hiding a service message .............. 300 Notes ............................................. 300 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 300 Service message ............................ 300 Special service requirements ......... 301 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 71 Function ........................................... 71 Interior motion sensor ..................... 72 Switching off the alarm .................... 71 Tow-away protection ........................ 71 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 220 Display message ............................ 243 Function/notes ............................. 192 Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ 239 see Lights Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 146 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 145 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 111 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. 151 Automatic drive program ............... 152 Changing gear ............................... 151 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 149 Display message ............................ 254 Drive position (ECO start/stop function) ........................................ 150 Drive program display .................... 149 Driving tips .................................... 151 Emergency running mode .............. 156 Engaging drive position .................. 150 Engaging neutral ............................ 150 Engaging reverse gear ................... 150 Engaging the park position ............ 149 Kickdown ....................................... 151 Manual drive program .................... 154 Neutral (ECO start/stop function) . 150 Overview ........................................ 148 Problem (fault) ............................... 156 Program selector button ................ Pulling away ................................... Selector lever ................................ Shift ranges ................................... Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... Transmission position display ........ Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency running mode ......................... Auxiliary heating Activating/deactivating ................. Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. Problem (display message) ............ Remote control .............................. Setting ........................................... Setting the departure time ............. Auxiliary ventilation Activating/deactivating ................. Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. Problem (display message) ............ Remote control .............................. 151 143 148 153 143 152 149 149 150 156 133 133 255 132 136 133 225 135 133 133 136 133 B Bag hook ............................................ 277 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 63 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) .................................................... 64 Battery (key) Checking .......................................... 79 Important safety notes .................... 79 Replacing ......................................... 79 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 318 Display message ............................ 242 Important safety notes .................. 316 Jump starting ................................. 319 Belt see Seat belt Belt force limiters (activation) ........... 41 5 6 Index Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 41 Function ........................................... 51 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 220 Display message ............................ 246 Notes/function .............................. 197 see Active Blind Spot Assist Bluetooth® SAP V3 telephone module see Separate operating instructions Bonnet Closing ........................................... 297 Display message ............................ 255 Opening ......................................... 296 Boot Emergency release .......................... 87 Important safety notes .................... 85 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 87 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 86 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 85 Boot lid Display message ............................ 254 Opening/closing .............................. 85 Opening dimensions ...................... 366 Boot load (maximum) ........................ 366 Bottle holders .................................... 281 Box (boot) ........................................... 277 Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 234 Notes ............................................. 365 Brake lamps Adaptive ........................................... 65 Display message ............................ 238 Brakes ABS .................................................. 63 BAS .................................................. 63 BAS PLUS ........................................ 64 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 365 Display message ............................ 232 Driving tips .................................... 162 High-performance brake system .... 163 Important safety notes .................. 162 Parking brake ................................ 160 Warning lamp ................................. 260 Breakdown see Flat tyre see Towing away Bulbs see Changing bulbs C Calling up a fault see Display messages Car see Vehicle Care Automatic car wash ....................... 301 Carpets .......................................... 307 Display ........................................... 305 Exterior lighting ............................. 304 Gear or selector lever .................... 306 High-pressure cleaner .................... 302 Interior ........................................... 305 Matt paintwork .............................. 303 Night View Assist Plus ................... 305 Notes ............................................. 301 Paint .............................................. 303 Plastic trim .................................... 306 Reversing camera .......................... 305 Roof lining ...................................... 307 Seat belt ........................................ 307 Seat cover ..................................... 306 Sensors ......................................... 304 Steering wheel ............................... 306 Tail pipes ....................................... 305 Trim pieces .................................... 306 Washing by hand ........................... 302 Wheels ........................................... 303 Windows ........................................ 304 Wiper blades .................................. 304 Wooden trim .................................. 306 Car wash (care) ................................. 301 CD player/CD changer(on-board computer) .......................................... 216 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 225 Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 77 Index Centre console Lower section .................................. 35 Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 36 Upper section .................................. 34 Changing bulbs Important safety notes .................. 119 Overview of bulb types .................. 120 Reversing lamps ............................ 120 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 61 Rear doors ....................................... 62 Children In the vehicle ................................... 52 Restraint systems ............................ 52 Child seat Automatic recognition ..................... 54 ISOFIX .............................................. 56 On the front-passenger seat ............ 54 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 58 Recommendations ........................... 60 Suitable positions ............................ 58 Top Tether ....................................... 57 Cigarette lighter ................................ 283 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 304 Climate control Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 132 Controlling automatically ............... 128 Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) ................. 131 Cooling with air dehumidification . . 127 Demisting the windows .................. 130 Demisting the windscreen ............. 130 Important safety notes .................. 124 Indicator lamp ................................ 128 Information on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control .................................. 127 Notes on using THERMATIC automatic climate control ..................... 125 Overview of systems ...................... 124 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 128 Problem with the rear window heating .......................................... 131 Rear control panel ......................... 126 Setting the air distribution ............. 129 Setting the airflow ......................... 129 Setting the air vents ...................... 136 Setting the climate mode (AIR FLOW) ............................................ 128 Setting the temperature ................ 128 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 131 Switching on/off ........................... 127 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 132 Switching the rear window heating on/off ...................................... 131 Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 130 THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone) ............................. 125 THERMOTRONIC (3-zone) automatic climate control ..................... 126 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 28 see Instrument cluster Collapsible emergency spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 305 COMAND Online see separate operating instructions Combination switch .......................... 113 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 213 Convenience box ............................... 277 Convenience closing feature .............. 89 Convenience opening/closing (airrecirculation mode) ........................... 131 Convenience opening feature ............ 89 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 299 Display message ............................ 240 Important safety notes .................. 365 Temperature (on-board computer) . 228 Temperature gauge ........................ 210 Warning lamp ................................. 267 Cooling see Climate control Cornering light function Display message ............................ 237 Function/notes ............................. 115 Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... 119 7 8 Index Cruise control Activation conditions ..................... Cruise control lever ....................... Deactivating ................................... Display message ............................ Driving system ............................... Important safety notes .................. LIM indicator lamp ......................... Selecting ........................................ Setting a speed .............................. Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. Cup holder Centre console .............................. Important safety notes .................. Rear centre console ....................... Rear compartment ......................... 166 165 167 249 165 165 165 166 167 166 279 279 280 280 D Dashboard see Instrument cluster Dashboard lighting see Instrument cluster lighting Data see Technical data Daytime driving lights Display message ............................ 239 Function/notes ............................. 111 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 222 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. 223 Interior lighting .............................. 224 Diagnostics connection ...................... 23 Diesel particle filter .......................... 162 Digital speedometer ......................... 213 Dipped-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 237 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ........................................ 110 Setting for driving on the right/ left ................................................. 223 Switching on/off ........................... 111 DIRECT SELECT lever see Automatic transmission Display message ASSYST PLUS ................................ 300 General information ....................... 231 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 231 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 257 Display messages Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 231 Driving systems ............................. 243 Engine ............................................ 240 Key ................................................ 256 Lights ............................................. 237 Safety systems .............................. 232 Tyres .............................................. 250 Vehicle ........................................... 254 Distance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 219 Distance warning signal (warning lamp) .................................................. 269 DISTRONIC PLUS Deactivating ................................... 177 Display message ............................ 248 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 176 Function/notes ............................. 170 Important safety notes .................. 170 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 176 Warning lamp ................................. 269 Door Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 225 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 84 Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 77 Control panel ................................... 38 Display message ............................ 255 Emergency locking ........................... 84 Emergency unlocking ....................... 84 Important safety notes .................... 82 Opening (from the inside) ................ 82 Drive program Automatic ...................................... 152 Display ........................................... 149 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 149 Manual ........................................... 154 Drive program selector ..................... 152 Index Driver's door see Door Drive system Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 201 Driving abroad Service24h .................................... 301 Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 110 Driving on flooded roads .................. 164 Driving safety system BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) ............................................... 64 Electronic Brake-force Distribution .................................................. 68 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 65 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ........................................... 66 Important safety guidelines ............. 62 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 63 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 68 Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 65 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 63 Overview .......................................... 62 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 68 Driving system Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 204 Active Parking Assist ..................... 187 Driving systems Active Driving Assistance package ................................................. 201 AIRMATIC ...................................... 181 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension .......................................... 183 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 192 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 197 Cruise control ................................ 165 Display message ............................ 243 Distronic Plus ................................ 170 HOLD function ............................... 179 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 199 Lane package ................................ 197 Night View Assist Plus ................... 194 PARKTRONIC ................................. 185 RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 180 Reversing camera .......................... 190 Speed Limit Assist ......................... SPEEDTRONIC ............................... Driving tips AMG ceramic brakes ..................... Aquaplaning ................................... Automatic transmission ................. Brakes ........................................... Downhill gradient ........................... Driving abroad ............................... Driving in winter ............................. Driving on flooded roads ................ Driving on wet roads ...................... General .......................................... Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... New brake pads/linings ................ Running-in tips ............................... Snow chains .................................. Symmetrical dipped beam ............. Wet road surface ........................... DVD audio Operating (on-board computer) ..... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... 193 168 163 164 151 162 162 110 164 164 164 161 165 163 163 140 331 110 163 216 216 E EASY-ENTRY feature Activating/deactivating ................. 226 Function/notes ............................. 104 EASY-EXIT feature Crash-responsive ........................... 104 Function/notes ............................. 104 Switching on/off ........................... 226 EASY-PACK convenience box ........... 277 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 234 Function/notes ................................ 68 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 161 On-board computer ....................... 213 ECO start/stop function Deactivating/activating ................. 145 General information ....................... 144 Electrical fuses see Fuses 9 10 Index Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Electronic Traction System see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Emergency key Unlocking the driver's door .............. 84 Emergency key element Function/notes ................................ 78 Locking vehicle ................................ 84 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 84 Fuel filler flap ................................. 157 Emergency spare wheel Important safety notes .................. 351 Inflating the collapsible spare wheel ............................................. 352 Points to remember ....................... 351 Removing ....................................... 351 Storage location ............................ 351 Stowing .......................................... 352 Technical data ............................... 354 Emergency unlocking Vehicle ............................................. 84 Engine Display message ............................ 240 ECO start/stop function ................ 144 Engine number ............................... 359 Jump-starting ................................. 319 Running irregularly ......................... 147 Starting problems .......................... 147 Starting the engine with the key .... 143 Starting with KEYLESS GO ............. 143 Stopping ........................................ 160 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 323 Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) ............................................... 266 Engine electronics Notes ............................................. 357 Problem (fault) ............................... 147 Engine oil Additives ........................................ 364 Checking the oil level ..................... 297 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 298 Display message ............................ 242 Filling capacity ............................... 364 Notes about oil grades ................... 363 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 297 Temperature (on-board computer) . 228 Topping up ..................................... 298 Viscosity ........................................ 364 Environmental protection Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 21 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 228 Deactivating/activating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 66 Deactivating/activating (except AMG vehicles) ................................ 219 Deactivating/activating (notes; except AMG vehicles) ...................... 66 Display message ............................ 232 ETS/4ETS ........................................ 66 Function/notes ................................ 65 Important safety guidelines ............. 65 Warning lamp ................................. 263 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 66 Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 305 Exterior lighting Settings options ............................. 110 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 105 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 106 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 106 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 105 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 227 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 106 Parking position ............................. 106 Resetting ....................................... 106 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 107 F Fault message see Display messages Filler cap see Fuel filler flap Fire extinguisher ............................... 311 Index First-aid kit ......................................... 310 Fitting a wheel Removing a wheel .......................... 339 Fitting wheels Fitting a wheel ............................... 340 Lowering the vehicle ...................... 340 Raising the vehicle ......................... 338 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 337 Flat tyre MOExtended tyres ......................... 313 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 312 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 313 Floormat ............................................. 292 Foglamps (extended range) .............. 116 Frequencies Garage door opener ....................... 289 Mobile phone ................................. 357 Two-way radio ................................ 357 Fuel Additives ........................................ 361 Consumption information .............. 363 Consumption statistics .................. 213 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 213 Displaying the range ...................... 213 Fuel gauge ............................... 30, 209 Grade (petrol) ................................ 360 Important safety notes .................. 360 Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 361 Problem (malfunction) ................... 158 Quality (diesel) ............................... 362 Refuelling ....................................... 156 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 360 Fuel filler flap Emergency release ........................ 157 Opening/closing ............................ 157 Fuel filter (white display message) . 243 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 213 Gauge ...................................... 30, 209 Fuel reserve see Fuel Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 360 Problem (malfunction) ................... 158 Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool kit) ...................................................... Fuses Allocation chart ............................. Before changing ............................. Fuse box in the boot ...................... Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. Important safety notes .................. 311 324 324 325 324 324 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... Frequencies ................................... Important safety notes .................. Opening/closing the garage door .. Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... Gear indicator (on-board computer) .................................................. Gearshift program SETUP (on-board computer) .......... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Glove compartment .......................... 289 289 287 288 287 228 228 356 273 H Handbrake see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps ...................... 114 Headbag Display message ............................ 237 Headlamp Cleaning system (function) ............ 114 Cleaning system (notes) ................ 366 Headlamps Misting up ...................................... 117 Topping up the cleaning system .... 299 see Automatic headlamp mode Head restraints Adjusting ......................................... 98 Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 99 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 98 Adjusting (rear) ................................ 99 Fitting/removing (rear) .................... 99 Luxury .............................................. 99 11 12 Index Heating see Climate control High-pressure cleaners .................... Hill start assist .................................. HOLD function Display message ............................ Function/notes ............................. 302 144 245 179 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobiliser .......................................... 70 In-car hotspot see Separate operating instructions Indicator and warning lamps Coolant .......................................... 267 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 269 Engine diagnostics ......................... 266 Fuel tank ........................................ 267 SPORT handling mode ................... 264 Indicator lamps Display message ............................ 238 see Warning and indicator lamps Insect protection on the radiator .... 297 Inspection see ASSYST PLUS Instrument cluster Overview .................................. 30, 209 Settings ......................................... 221 Warning and indicator lamps ....................................... 32, 258 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 222 Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating ................. 222 Display message ............................ 239 Overview ........................................ 115 Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left . 223 Interior lighting ................................. 118 Automatic control system .............. 118 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) ...................................... 224 Emergency lighting ........................ 119 Manual control ............................... 119 Overview ........................................ 118 Reading lamp ................................. 118 Setting brightness for display/ switches (on-board computer) ....... 222 Setting the ambient lighting brightness (on-board computer) .... 223 Setting the ambient lighting colour (on-board computer) ................ 223 Interior motion sensor ........................ 72 ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 56 J Jack Storage location ............................ 311 Using ............................................. 338 Jump start (engine) see Jump starting (engine) Jump starting (engine) ...................... 319 K Key Changing the battery ....................... 79 Checking the battery ....................... 79 Convenience closing feature ............ 89 Convenience opening feature .......... 89 Display message ............................ 256 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 77 Emergency key element ................... 78 Important safety notes .................... 76 Loss ................................................. 81 Modifying the programming ............. 78 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 141 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81 Starting the engine ........................ 143 KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing ........................ 89 Display message ............................ 257 Locking ............................................ 77 Start/Stop button .......................... 141 Starting the engine ........................ 143 Unlocking ......................................... 77 Key positions Key ................................................ 141 KEYLESS GO .................................. 141 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 151 Manual drive program .................... 154 Kneebag ............................................... 44 Index L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane detection (automatic) see Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. Display message ............................ Function/information .................... Lane package ..................................... Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... Lashing eyelets ................................. Lighting see Lights Lights Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System ........................ Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off ....... Active light function ....................... Automatic headlamp mode ............ Cornering light function ................. Dipped-beam headlamps ............... Driving abroad ............................... Foglamps (extended range) ........... Hazard warning lamps ................... Headlamp flasher ........................... Light switch ................................... Main-beam headlamps ................... Motorway mode ............................. Parking lamps ................................ Rear foglamp ................................. Setting brightness for display/ switches (on-board computer) ....... Setting the ambient lighting brightness (on-board computer) .... Setting the ambient lighting colour (on-board computer) ................ Side lamps ..................................... Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off ................................. Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (on-board computer) . Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................ 220 246 199 197 228 276 222 224 115 111 115 111 110 116 114 114 110 113 115 113 112 222 223 223 112 223 222 223 Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) .......... 223 Turn signals ................................... 113 see Changing bulbs see Interior lighting Light sensor (display message) ....... 239 LIM indicator lamp Cruise control ................................ 165 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 172 Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 168 Limiting the speed see SPEEDTRONIC Loading guidelines ............................ 272 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 84 Emergency locking ........................... 84 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 83 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 225 Lumbar support Adjusting ....................................... 101 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 101 Luxury head restraint ......................... 99 M M+S tyres ........................................... Main-beam headlamps Display message ............................ Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off ................................. Switching on/off ........................... Massage function (PULSE) ............... Matt finish (cleaning instructions) . . Memory card (audio) ......................... Memory function ............................... Mercedes-Benz Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. Messages see Display messages 330 238 117 113 101 303 216 107 231 13 14 Index Mirror see Vanity mirror (in sun visor) Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror Mobile phone Frequencies ................................... 357 Installation ..................................... 357 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 217 Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 284 Sliding adapter ............................... 286 Transmission output (maximum) .... 357 Modifying the programming (key) ..... 78 MOExtended tyres ............................. 313 Motorway mode ................................ 115 MP3 Operating ....................................... 216 see Separate operating instructions Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 211 Permanent display ......................... 221 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer . 210 Overview .......................................... 33 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 214 NECK-PRO head restraints Operation ......................................... 46 Resetting after being triggered ........ 47 NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Operation ......................................... 46 Resetting after being triggered ........ 47 Night View Assist Plus Activating/deactivating ................. 195 Cleaning ......................................... 305 Function/notes ............................. 194 Problem (fault) ............................... 197 Notes on running in a new vehicle . . 140 O Occupant safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 52 Important safety notes .................... 40 Odometer see Total distance recorder see Trip meter Oil see Engine oil On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 228 Assistance menu ........................... 218 Audio menu ................................... 215 Convenience submenu .................. 226 Displaying a service message ........ 300 Display messages .......................... 231 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 176 Factory setting submenu ............... 227 Heating submenu ........................... 225 Important safety notes .................. 208 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 221 Light submenu ............................... 222 Menu overview .............................. 212 Message memory .......................... 231 Navigation menu ............................ 214 Operating the TV ............................ 216 Operating video DVD ..................... 216 Operation ....................................... 210 RACETIMER ................................... 228 Service menu ................................. 220 Settings menu ............................... 221 Standard display ............................ 212 Telephone menu ............................ 217 Trip menu ...................................... 212 Vehicle submenu ........................... 224 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature display ........... 210 Overhead control panel ...................... 37 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 62 P Paint code .......................................... 359 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 303 Panic alarm .......................................... 40 Index Parking ............................................... 159 Important safety notes .................. 159 Parking brake ................................ 160 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 106 Reversing camera .......................... 190 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Active Parking Assist ..................... 187 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message ............................ 234 Notes/function .............................. 160 Warning lamp ................................. 266 Parking lamps Display message ............................ 239 Switching on/off ........................... 113 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 186 Driving system ............................... 185 Function/notes ............................. 185 Important safety notes .................. 185 Problem (fault) ............................... 187 Sensor range ................................. 185 Warning display ............................. 186 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp ...................................................... 54 Petrol .................................................. 360 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 306 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant safety system) Display message ............................ 235 Operation ......................................... 48 PRE-SAFE® Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 219 Display message ............................ 235 Function/notes ................................ 68 Warning lamp ................................. 269 Product information ............................ 21 Program selector button .................. 151 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 21 Pulling away (automatic transmission) .................................................... 143 Q Qualified specialist workshop ........... 23 R RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 180 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 228 Radar sensors Overview ........................................ 368 Radar sensor system Activating/deactivating ................. 225 Display message ............................ 245 Radiator cover ................................... 297 Radio Selecting a station ......................... 215 see separate operating instructions Rain closing feature (sliding sunroof) ...................................................... 92 Reading lamp ..................................... 118 Rear compartment Setting the air vents ...................... 137 Rear-compartment seat belt status indicator ........................................ 51 Rear foglamp Display message ............................ 239 Switching on/off ........................... 112 Rear seat Display message ............................ 255 Rear seat (folding the backrest forwards/back) ...................................... 275 Rear Seat Entertainment System see Separate operating instructions Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 106 Dipping (manual) ........................... 105 Rear window blind ............................ 282 Rear window heating Problem (fault) ............................... 131 Switching on/off ........................... 131 Refuelling Fuel gauge ............................... 30, 209 Important safety notes .................. 156 Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 361 Refuelling process ......................... 157 see Fuel 15 16 Index Remote control Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... Changing the batteries (auxiliary heating) ......................................... Garage door opener ....................... Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... Replacing the battery (auxiliary heating remote control) .................... Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ Warning lamp ................................. Residual heat (climate control) ........ Restraint system see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Rev counter ........................................ Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... Reversing camera Cleaning instructions ..................... Function/notes ............................. Switching on/off ........................... Reversing lamp Changing bulbs .............................. Reversing lamp (display message) . . Roller sunblind Rear window .................................. Roof carrier ........................................ Roof lining and carpets (cleaning instructions) ...................................... Roof load (maximum) ........................ 133 135 287 287 135 242 267 132 210 148 305 190 191 120 239 282 278 307 366 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 52 Child restraint systems .................... 52 Safety system see Driving safety system Seat Seat backrest display message ..... 255 Seat belt Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 50 Adjusting the height ......................... 50 Belt force limiter .............................. 51 Belt tensioner .................................. 51 Cleaning ......................................... 307 Display message ............................ 235 Fastening ......................................... 49 Important safety guidelines ............. 48 Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 51 Releasing ......................................... 50 Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...................... 227 Warning lamp ................................. 259 Warning lamp (function) ................... 51 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98 Adjusting lumbar support .............. 101 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 101 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 98 Cleaning the cover ......................... 306 Correct driver's seat position ........... 96 Important safety notes .................... 97 Seat heating problem .................... 102 Seat ventilation problem ................ 102 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 107 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 101 Switching the seat ventilation on/ off .................................................. 102 Selector lever Cleaning ......................................... 306 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 304 Service see ASSYST PLUS Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Service menu (on-board computer) . 220 Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 365 Coolant (engine) ............................ 365 Engine oil ....................................... 363 Fuel ................................................ 360 Important safety notes .................. 359 Washer fluid ................................... 366 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 227 On-board computer ....................... 221 Setting the air distribution ............... 129 Setting the airflow ............................ 129 SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 228 Index Short journeys (diesel particle filter) ...................................................... 162 Sidebag ................................................ 45 Side lamps Switching on/off ........................... 112 Side windows Convenience closing ........................ 89 Convenience opening ...................... 89 Important safety notes .................... 87 Opening/closing .............................. 88 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 91 resetting .......................................... 90 Sliding sunroof Important safety information ........... 91 Opening/closing .............................. 92 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 93 Rain closing feature ......................... 92 Resetting ......................................... 92 Snow chains ...................................... 331 Socket Centre console .............................. 284 Rear compartment ......................... 284 Under the armrest ......................... 284 Sockets General notes ................................ 283 Spare wheel Storing ........................................... 352 Specialist workshop ............................ 23 Spectacles compartment ................. 273 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speed Limit Assist Activating/deactivating the warning function .................................... 218 Displaying ...................................... 218 Display message ............................ 244 Display message in the multifunction display .................................... 194 Important safety notes .................. 193 Speedometer Digital ............................................ 213 In the Instrument cluster ......... 30, 209 Segments ...................................... 210 Selecting the unit of measurement .............................................. 221 see Instrument cluster SPEEDTRONIC Deactivating variable ..................... 170 Display message ............................ 249 Function/notes ............................. 168 Important safety notes .................. 168 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 168 Permanent ..................................... 170 Selecting ........................................ 168 Storing the current speed .............. 169 Variable ......................................... 168 SPORT handling mode Activating/deactivating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 66 Warning lamp ................................. 264 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Display message ............................ 236 Introduction ..................................... 41 Warning lamp ................................. 266 Warning lamp (function) ................... 41 Starting (engine) ................................ 142 Steering (display message) .............. 256 Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 103 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 103 Button overview ............................... 33 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 210 Cleaning ......................................... 306 Gearshift paddles ........................... 152 Important safety notes .................. 102 Steering wheel heating .................. 103 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 107 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 152 Steering wheel heating Problem (malfunction) ................... 104 Switching on/off ........................... 103 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 228 Stowage areas ................................... 272 Stowage compartment Spectacles compartment ............... 273 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 274 Centre console .............................. 273 Centre console (rear compartment) ............................................. 275 Cup holder ..................................... 279 Glove compartment ....................... 273 17 18 Index Important safety information ......... 272 Rear ............................................... 275 Under driver's seat/frontpassenger seat .............................. 274 Stowage net ....................................... 275 Stowage space Stowage net ................................... 275 Stowage well beneath the boot floor .................................................... 278 Summer tyres .................................... 330 Sun visor ............................................ 281 Supplement Restraint System see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Surround lighting (on-board computer) .................................................. 223 Suspension tuning AIRMATIC ...................................... 182 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension .......................................... 183 SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 228 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 71 T Tail lamps Display message ............................ Tank see Fuel tank Technical data Emergency spare wheel ................. Information .................................... Tyres/wheels ................................. Vehicle data ................................... Telephone Accepting a call ............................. Display message ............................ Menu (on-board computer) ............ Number from the phone book ........ Redialling ....................................... Rejecting/ending a call ................. Telephone compartment ................ Temperature Coolant .......................................... Coolant (on-board computer) ......... Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... Outside temperature ...................... Setting (climate control) ................ 238 354 356 341 366 217 256 217 217 218 217 274 210 228 228 210 128 TEMPOMAT Function/notes ............................. 165 Theft-deterrent system ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 71 Immobiliser ...................................... 70 Through-loading feature ................... 275 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 228 Tiredness Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST TIREFIT kit .......................................... 313 Top Tether ............................................ 57 Total distance recorder .................... 212 Tow-away protection .......................... 71 Towing Important safety notes .................. 320 With the rear axle raised ................ 322 Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................... 321 Removing the towing eye ............... 322 With both axles on the ground ....... 322 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 323 Important safety notes .................. 320 Transmission see Automatic transmission Transmission position display ......... 149 Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 149 Transporting the vehicle .................. 323 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 306 Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. 213 Trip meter Calling up ....................................... 212 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 214 Turn signal see Turn signals Turn signals Switching on/off ........................... 113 TV Operating (on-board computer) ..... 216 see Separate operating instructions Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... 357 Installation ..................................... 357 Transmission output (maximum) .... 357 Index Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Display message ............................ Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tyre pressure loss warning Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Tyre pressure monitor Checking the tyre pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... Tyres Changing a wheel .......................... Checking ........................................ Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. MOExtended tyres ......................... Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Storing ........................................... Tyre size (data) .............................. Tyre tread ...................................... see Flat tyre 334 250 315 315 331 332 333 334 334 335 270 335 336 329 336 250 328 330 336 329 337 341 329 U Unladen weight ................................. 366 Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 84 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 83 V Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 281 Variable SPEEDTRONIC see SPEEDTRONIC Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 24 Data acquisition ............................... 24 Display message ............................ 254 Electronics ..................................... 357 Equipment ....................................... 22 Implied warranty .............................. 24 Individual settings .......................... 221 Leaving parked up ......................... 161 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 84 Locking (key) ................................... 77 Lowering ........................................ 340 Pulling away ................................... 143 Raising ........................................... 338 Registration ..................................... 24 Securing from rolling away ............ 337 Towing away .................................. 320 Transporting .................................. 323 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 84 Unlocking (key) ................................ 77 Vehicle data ................................... 366 Vehicle data ....................................... 366 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 366 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 84 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 359 Vehicle level AIRMATIC ...................................... 181 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension .......................................... 183 Vehicle level (display message) ....... 243 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 311 Vehicle weights ................................. 366 Video Operating the DVD ......................... 216 VIN ...................................................... 359 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 261 Brakes ........................................... 260 Distance warning signal ................. 269 ESP® .............................................. 263 ESP® OFF ....................................... 264 LIM (cruise control) ........................ 165 LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 172 LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 168 Overview .................................. 32, 258 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 54 19 20 Index Reserve fuel ................................... 267 Seat belt ........................................ 259 SRS ................................................ 266 Tyre pressure monitor ................... 270 Warning triangle ................................ 310 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 256 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 340 Wheel chock ...................................... 337 Wheels Changing/replacing ....................... 336 Changing a wheel .......................... 336 Checking ........................................ 329 Cleaning ......................................... 303 Cleaning (warning) ......................... 337 Emergency spare wheel ................. 351 Fitting a new wheel ........................ 340 Fitting a wheel ............................... 337 Important safety notes .................. 328 Removing a wheel .......................... 339 Storing ........................................... 337 Tightening torque ........................... 340 Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 341 Windowbag Operation ......................................... 46 Windows Cleaning ......................................... 304 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting ...................................... 130 Windscreen washer fluid see Windscreen washer system Windscreen washer system Notes ............................................. 366 Topping up ..................................... 299 Windscreen wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 122 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 121 Switching on/off ........................... 121 Winter operation Important safety notes .................. 330 Radiator cover ............................... 297 Slippery road surfaces ................... 165 Snow chains .................................. 331 Winter tyres Limiting the speed (on-board computer) ............................................. 224 M+S tyres ...................................... 330 Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... Important safety notes .................. Replacing ....................................... Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop 304 121 121 306 Introduction Protection of the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ryour Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Rmake Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration. Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Returning an end-of-life vehicle Mercedes-Benz will take back your Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environmentally responsible manner, in accordance the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of up to 3.5 t, in accordance with national regulations. For several years, Mercedes-Benz has been meeting all the legal requirements for a design which allows for recycling and re-use. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants which can recycle your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. The methods employed in vehicle and parts recycling are constantly being developed and improved. This means that your Mercedes-Benz will also continue to meet even the increased recycling quotas in the future in good time. You can obtain further information from your national MercedesBenz homepage or your national hotline number. Product information Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion parts and accessories that have been approved for the type of vehicle. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehiZ 21 22 Introduction cles. This is also the case, even if they have been independently or officially approved. The use of non-approved parts could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Mercedes-Benz therefore recommends that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion parts and accessories that have been approved for the type of vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approved conversion parts and accessories are available from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Here, you will receive advice about permissible technical modifications, and the parts will be professionally fitted. Printed Owner's Manual The printed Owner's Manual (including any Supplements) must be observed. There is no electronic update to the Digital Owner's Manual. Amendments are only made to the printed Owner's Manual. Owner's Manual General notes Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should kept in the vehicle. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING All work on the vehicle and, in particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Some safety systems only function when the engine is running. You should therefore never switch off the engine when driving. Otherwise, the safety systems of your vehicle may not function correctly and as a result will no longer protect you and other persons as intended. In addition, there is a risk that you may lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an accident. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations made to the vehicle, e.g. re-routing of cables under coverings, could cause the safety systems of your vehicle to stop working properly. The safety systems would thus no longer protect you and other persons as intended. In addition, there is a risk that you may lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an accident. All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g. installations or modifications, should there- Introduction fore be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If work on electronic equipment and its software is carried out incorrectly, this equipment could stop working. The electronic systems are networked via interfaces. Tampering with these electronic systems could cause malfunctions in systems which have not been modified. Malfunctions such as these can seriously jeopardise the vehicle's operating safety and therefore your own safety. You should therefore have all work and modifications to electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Declarations of conformity Wireless vehicle components The following information applies to all components of the vehicle and the COMAND system which receive and/or transmit radio waves: The components of this vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Directive 72/245/EEC or the equivalent ECE Regulation ECE-R 10. Diagnostics connection G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection, it can affect the operation of the vehicle systems. This could compromise the operating safety of your vehicle while driving. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection. G WARNING Loose equipment or cables hanging from a device which are connected to a diagnostic connection could impede pedal clearance. The equipment or cables could get caught between the pedals when driving and braking suddenly. This could impair the function of the pedals. There is a risk of accident. Do not attach any equipment or cables in the driver's footwell. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: Rwork relevant to safety and maintenance work Rrepair work Rmodifications, installations and conversions Rwork on electronic components Rservice Z 23 24 Introduction Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases: Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. Correct use G WARNING Various warning stickers are affixed to your vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your attention, and the attention of others, to various dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warning stickers unless the sticker clearly states that you may do so. If you remove the warning stickers, you or others could be injured by failing to recognise certain dangers. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rthe Technical Data section in this manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Data stored in the vehicle Fault data Components which are critical for vehicle operation are equipped with fault data memories as standard. There are also data storage devices which record how vehicle components have reacted in certain driving situations (e.g. airbag deployment or ESP® intervention). This data is used exclusively to: Rassist in the rectification of faults and defects Rhelp Mercedes-Benz optimise and develop vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced by MercedesBenz, this technical information can be read out from the fault memory. This is performed by authorised employees of the MercedesBenz service network using special diagnostic computers. After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the memory. Other memory data is constantly overwritten. Other devices that store data Depending on the equipment level, your vehicle may feature communications and/or entertainment systems (e.g. navigation devices, telephone systems). These allow you to Introduction save and edit data required for the operation of the respective device. Further information on operation (e.g. on deleting data) can be found in the separate operating instructions. Copyright information FreeType Portions of this software are copyright © 2005 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. © 1996-2000 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. Gnu compiler Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistribution of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Z 25 26 Cockpit ................................................. Instrument cluster .............................. Multifunction steering wheel ............. Centre console .................................... Overhead control panel ...................... Door control panel .............................. 28 30 33 34 37 38 At a glance 27 28 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel gearshift paddles 152 ; Combination switch 113 = Instrument cluster 30 ? Horn A DIRECT SELECT lever 149 B PARKTRONIC warning display 185 C Overhead control panel 37 D Climate control systems 124 E Ignition lock Start/Stop button 141 141 Function Page F Adjusts the steering wheel manually 102 G Adjusts the steering wheel electrically Steering wheel heating 102 103 H Cruise control lever 165 I Parking brake 160 J Diagnostics connection K Opens the bonnet 296 L Releases the parking brake 160 M Light switch 110 N Night View Assist Plus 194 23 29 At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Overhead control panel ; PARKTRONIC warning display 185 = Combination switch 113 ? Instrument cluster 30 A Horn B DIRECT SELECT lever 149 C Steering wheel gearshift paddles 152 D Light switch 110 E Night View Assist Plus 194 F Releases the parking brake 160 37 Function Page G Opens the bonnet H Diagnostics connection I Ignition lock Start/Stop button 141 141 J Adjusts the steering wheel manually 102 K Adjusts the steering wheel electrically Steering wheel heating 102 103 L Cruise control lever 165 M Parking brake 160 N Climate control systems 124 296 23 30 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster Displays i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function Function Page : Speedometer with segments 210 ; Multifunction display 211 i Set the instrument cluster lighting via the on-board computer (Y page 222). Page = Rev counter 210 ? Coolant temperature 210 A Fuel gauge 31 At a glance Instrument cluster i Instrument cluster: miles Function Function Page : Speedometer with segments 210 ; Multifunction display 211 i Set the instrument cluster lighting via the on-board computer (Y page 222). Page = Rev counter 210 ? Coolant temperature 210 A Fuel gauge 32 Instrument cluster At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function : Page Function Page G ü Seat belt 259 H % Diesel engine: preglow ÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 143 I ? Coolant 267 113 J K Main-beam headlamp 113 J Brakes (red) 260 K J Only for certain vehicles: brakes (yellow) L Dipped-beam headlamps 111 260 L T Side lamps 112 C ! ABS 261 M R Rear foglamp 112 D 6 SRS 266 N E ; Engine diagnostics 266 N This lamp has no function F h Tyre pressure monitor 270 O 8 Reserve fuel ÷ ESP® M SPORT handling mode in AMG vehicles 263 ; · Distance warning 269 = å ESP® OFF 263 ? #! Turn signals A B 264 264 267 Multifunction steering wheel 33 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Audio/COMAND display; see the separate operating instructions = ? Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions ? ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits telephone book/ redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute Page 211 Function A B 217 =; Selects a menu 9: Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms the selection Hides display messages % Back Switches off LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions Page 210 210 210 231 210 34 Centre console At a glance Centre console Centre console, upper section Function : Page Function B Audio system/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions ; c Seat heating 101 = s Seat ventilation 102 ? c PARKTRONIC 185 A ¤ ECO start/stop function 144 C D E 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp Page 54 £ Hazard warning lamps 114 u Rear window roller sunblind 282 & Auxiliary heating 132 Centre console 35 At a glance Centre console, lower section Function F G H Page Stowage compartment Ashtray Cigarette lighter Power socket Cup holders 272 282 283 283 279 e Sets the suspension tuning 182 É Sets the vehicle level 181 Function Page I Stowage compartment 272 J Ú Selects the drive program 151 K COMAND controller; see the separate operating instructions 36 Centre console At a glance Centre console, lower section (AMG vehicles) Function Page Function Page F Cup holders 279 K Stowage compartment 272 G Engages parking position P 160 L H Selector lever 148 ß Calls up/saves the suspension tuning 183 I Ashtray Cigarette lighter Power socket 282 283 283 à Sets the suspension tuning 183 J COMAND controller; see the separate operating instructions M N å ESP® O Drive program selector 66 152 Overhead control panel 37 At a glance Overhead control panel Function : ; = ? A u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off Page 119 p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 118 Rear-view mirror 71 106 Page B Buttons for the garage door opener C 3 Opens/closes the sliding sunroof 92 ê Deactivates the interior motion sensor 72 p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 118 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 119 119 | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off ë Deactivates towaway protection Function D E F 287 38 Door control panel At a glance Door control panel Function : ; r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel Page B 107 Adjusts the seats electrically 98 %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle 83 ? Opens the door 82 A 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically = Function 105 C D Page W Opens/closes the side windows 88 n Activates/deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment 62 p Opens/closes the boot lid 87 Useful information .............................. Panic alarm .......................................... Occupant safety .................................. Children in the vehicle ........................ Driving safety systems ....................... Anti-theft systems .............................. 40 40 40 52 62 70 Safety 39 Occupant safety 40 Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Safety els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 23). Panic alarm Occupant safety Important safety notes G WARNING If service work is not carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle may be affected. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Moreover, the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to or work performed incorrectly on the following parts can result in the restraint systems not functioning as intended: Rthe To activate: press ! button : for at least one second. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle. X i The panic alarm function is only available in Mexico. restraint system, consisting of seat belts and their anchorage points, belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags Rthe wiring Rnetworked electronic systems Airbags and belt tensioners could fail to deploy or be triggered in an accident despite the deceleration force being sufficient to trigger the systems, or could be triggered unintentionally. For this reason, never make any modifications to the restraint systems. Therefore, you must not tamper with electronic components or their software. The seat belts, together with SRS (Supplemental Restraint System), are complementary, co-ordinated restraint systems (Y page 41). They reduce the risk of injury in specific, pre-defined types of accident situations and thereby increase occupant safety. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Occupant safety Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 96). Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly (Y page 48). Rthe airbags can inflate unrestricted if deployed (Y page 42). Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly (Y page 102). Rthe restraint systems have not been modified. An airbag increases the protection of vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. However, airbags are only an additional restraint system which complements, but does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle occupants must wear their seat belt correctly at all times, even if the vehicle is equipped with airbags. The airbags are not deployed in all types of accidents. For example, if the protective capacity of correctly fastened seat belts is not increased by deploying the airbags, the airbags will not deploy. Airbag deployment only provides increased protection if the seat belt is worn correctly. First, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the airbag. Second, in a head-on collision, for example, the seat belt prevents the vehicle occupant from being propelled towards the point of impact. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Introduction SRS consists of: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp Rairbags Rthe airbag control unit with crash sensors Rbelt tensioners Rbelt force limiters SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident. Safety To ensure that the restraint systems can deliver their full potential protection, make sure that: 41 SRS warning lamp G WARNING If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. A malfunction has occurred if: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on. Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp does not go out after a few seconds. Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up again. In this case, have SRS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. SRS functions are checked regularly when you switch on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags During the first stage of a collision, the airbag control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rmagnitude Based on the evaluation of this data, the airbag control unit pre-emptively triggers the belt tensioners in the first stage. Z Safety 42 Occupant safety If there is an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a longitudinal direction, the front airbags are also deployed. Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. The airbag control unit evaluates vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the event of a collision. In the first deployment stage, the front airbag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front airbag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The belt tensioner and airbag triggering thresholds are variable and are adapted to the rate of deceleration or acceleration of the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering process must take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly, e.g. the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, airbags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. i The front belt tensioners can only be trig- gered if the seat belt tongues on the front seats are correctly engaged in the seat belt buckles. i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci- dent. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. How the airbag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the apparent type of accident: Rhead-on collision impact Roverturn Rside Airbags Important safety notes G WARNING Airbags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. Observe the following notes to reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury caused by airbag deployment: Rall vehicle occupants – in particular, pregnant women – must wear their seat belt correctly at all times and lean back against the backrest, which should be positioned as close to the vertical as possible. The head restraint must support the back of the head at about eye level. Ralways secure children less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in suitable child restraint systems. Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat position that is as far away from the airbag as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The driver's chest should be as far away from the centre of the driver's airbag cover as possible. the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. This is especially important if you have secured a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children – must not lean their heads into the area of the window in which the sidebag/windowbag is deployed. Rrearward-facing child restraint systems must not be fitted to the front-passenger seat unless the front-passenger airbag has been disabled. On the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger airbag is disabled if a child restraint system with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the front-passenger seat in a vehicle equipped with automatic child seat recognition. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be continuously lit. If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition, or your rearward-facing child restraint system does not have a transponder for automatic child seat recognition, children must be secured in a child restraint system on a suitable seat in the rear. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharpedged objects in the pockets of clothing. Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of the driver's/front-passenger front airbag, particularly when the vehicle is in motion. Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard. Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. You could be injured if the airbag is deployed and you are holding the inside of the steering wheel. Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the vehicle. 43 sure that there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and the area where the airbags are deployed. Rdo not place any objects between the seat backrest and the door. Rdo not hang any hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders, to the doors. It is not possible to rule out a risk of injury being caused by an airbag, due to the high speed at which the airbag must be deployed. Safety Rmove Occupant safety Rmake G WARNING Airbag functionality can only be assured if the following parts are not covered and no badges or stickers are attached to them: Rpadded steering wheel boss cover below the steering column Rfront-passenger airbag cover Router side of front seat bolsters Rside trim next to the rear seat backrest Rroof frame cover between the front A-pillar and the C-pillar in the rear compartment Rkneebag G WARNING When an airbag deploys, a small amount of powder is released. The powder may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the vehicle interior. The powder does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. G WARNING The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has been deployed. Do not touch them as you could burn yourself. Z 44 Occupant safety Safety Have the airbags replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants are not protected by the airbags in the event of another accident. Airbag deployment slows down and restricts the movement of the vehicle occupant. If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. The airbag installation locations are identified by the AIRBAG symbol. Front airbags ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. The system may then detect that the seat is occupied and if there is an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side could be deployed. Have restraint systems that have been triggered replaced. They are deployed: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction Rif the system determines that airbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rdepending on whether the seat belt is being used Rindependently of other airbags in the vehicle If the vehicle overturns, the front airbags are generally not deployed. The front airbags are deployed if the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction. Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: frontpassenger airbag is only activated if the system determines that the front-passenger seat is occupied. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console does not light up (Y page 54). If a child restraint system is fitted to the frontpassenger seat and the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up on the centre console: Ra child restraint system without transpond- ers for automatic child seat recognition is fitted or Ra child restraint system with transponders is not properly fitted. Driver's kneebag Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. The front airbags increase protection for the driver's and front-passenger's head and chest. Occupant safety Rknee injuries Rthigh injuries Rlower leg injuries i The driver's kneebag is only available in certain countries. Sidebags G WARNING If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use seat covers that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The seat covers must have a special tear seam for sidebags/pelvisbags. Otherwise, the sidebag/pelvisbag cannot deploy correctly and would fail to provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat covers can be obtained, for example, from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. When deployed, the sidebags offer additional protection for the thorax of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. However, they do not protect the: Safety Driver's kneebag : deploys under the steering column. It is deployed together with the front airbags. The driver's kneebag is designed to operate together with the front airbags in frontal impacts if certain thresholds are exceeded. The driver's kneebag operates best in conjunction with correctly positioned and fastened seat belts. The driver's kneebag increases protection of the driver against: 45 Rhead Rneck Rarms The sidebags are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rindependently of the front airbags Rindependently of the belt tensioners If the vehicle overturns, the sidebags are generally not deployed. Sidebags are deployed if the system detects high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a lateral direction and determines that sidebag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt. Rat Pelvisbags G WARNING If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use seat covers that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The seat covers must have a special tear seam for sidebags/pelvisbags. Otherwise, the sidebag/pelvisbag cannot deploy correctly and would fail to provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat covers can be obtained, for example, from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Front sidebags : and rear sidebags; deploy next to the outer seat cushions. Z Occupant safety Windowbags : enhance the level of protection for the head, but not chest or arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The windowbags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. Windowbags are deployed: Safety 46 Rat Pelvisbag deployment enhances the level of protection of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. Pelvisbags : deploy next to and below the outer seat cushions. They are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rindependently of the front airbags Rindependently of the belt tensioners If the vehicle overturns, the pelvisbags are generally not deployed. Exception: if the system detects high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a lateral direction and determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt. Rat i Pelvisbags are only available in certain countries. Windowbags the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Ron the side on which an impact occurs Ron the driver's and the front passenger's side if the vehicle overturns and the system determines that windowbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Rindependently of the front airbags NECK-PRO head restraints/NECKPRO luxury head restraints Important safety notes G WARNING Only use head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. The use of non-approved head restraint covers may prevent NECK-PRO head restraints/ NECK-PRO luxury head restraints from triggering properly. The NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints can therefore not provide the intended protection. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre regarding availability. NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints increase protection of the driver's and front-passenger's head and neck. In the event of a rear collision of a cer- Occupant safety Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restraint NECK-PRO head restraints NECK-PRO head restraints Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down in the direction of arrow ; as far as it will go. X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion back in the direction of arrow = until the cushion engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint. X i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. NECK-PRO luxury head restraints NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle document wallet. X Slide resetting tool : into guide ; between the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint and the rear cover of the head restraint. X Push resetting tool : downwards until you hear the head restraint deployment mechanism engage. X Pull out resetting tool :. X Firmly press the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint cushion back = until it engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO luxury head restraint. X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle document wallet. X i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK- PRO luxury head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Safety tain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/ NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved forwards and upwards. This provides better head support. If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints have been triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats (Y page 47). Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints that have been triggered are moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Mercedes-Benz recommends having the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO head restraints checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a rear-end collision. 47 48 Occupant safety PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant protection) Safety G WARNING When adjusting the seat, make sure that nobody can become trapped. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when moving the seat back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rwhen BAS activates, e.g. in emergency braking situations Rwhen BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS Rif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. with the memory function: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavourable position. Rvehicles with a multicontour seat or active multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side bolsters of the seat cushion and backrest is increased. Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof/ panorama sliding sunroof and the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pretensioning. The air pressure in the side bolsters on the multicontour seat/active multicontour seat is reduced again. All setRvehicles tings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belts are not released: X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but only when the vehicle is stationary. The belt pretensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. More information about seat belt adjustment, a convenience function integrated into PRESAFE®, can be found under "Seat belt adjustment" (Y page 50). Seat belts Important safety notes G WARNING A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended level of protection. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Therefore, make sure that all occupants — in particular, pregnant women — wear their seat belts correctly at all times. RThe seat belt must fit snugly on your body and must not be twisted.Therefore, avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. The shoulder section of the belt must be routed across the centre of your shoulder — on no account across your neck or under your arm — and pulled tight against your upper body. The lap belt must always pass across your lap as low down as possible, i.e. over your hip joints — not across your abdomen. If necessary, push the seat belt slightly downwards and adjust it by pulling it in the direction the seat belt retracts. RDo not route the seat belt strap over sharp or fragile objects. Please make sure that such objects are not on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pens or keys etc. The seat belt strap could become damaged and tear during an accident and you or other vehicle occupants could be injured. ROnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Children must never travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. The child will not be secured in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden change of direction. This may result in the child or other occupants being seriously or fatally injured. RPersons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly. For this reason secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially designed, suitable restraint systems. RChildren under 1.50 m tall and younger than twelve years of age cannot wear the seat belts correctly. For this reason secure them in special suitable child restraint systems installed on a suitable seat. Additional information can be found in the Operating Instructions in the chapter "Safety", "Children in the Vehicle". Observe the installation instructions of the child restraint system manufacturer. RDo not secure an object with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. For this reason, check regularly that the seat belts are not damaged or dirty. Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to a load in an accident replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Seat belts are the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. Fastening seat belts G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection unless the backrest is almost vertical. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Before starting a journey, make sure that the seat is properly adjusted and that the backrest is almost vertical. G WARNING A dirty or damaged seat belt or one that has been modified or subjected to a load in an accident no longer offers the intended level of protection. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (Y page 96). X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt sash guide :. X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your pelvis. X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the driver's and front-passenger seat belts X Z 49 Safety Occupant safety Safety 50 Occupant safety automatically adjust to the upper body (Y page 50). X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height (Y page 50). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. Belt height adjustment For more information about releasing the seat belt with release button ?, see "Releasing seat belts" (Y page 50). Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock and you then engage the belt tongue in the buckle. The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (Y page 227). The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More information about PRE-SAFE® can be found under "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant protection)" (Y page 48). You can adjust the belt height for the front seats. Adjust the belt to a height that allows the upper part of the seat belt to be routed across the centre of your shoulder. X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. The belt sash guide engages in various positions. X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide release :. X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. X Let go of belt sash guide release : and make sure that the belt sash guide has engaged. Releasing the seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Occupant safety 51 Safety Rear seat belt status indicator Display for securely fastened occupants on left side of rear compartment (example) X X Press release button ? on belt buckle =. Slide belt tongue ; back to belt sash guide :. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder for all occupants to fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases when the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belt. For certain countries only: regardless of whether the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine is started. It then goes out if the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belt" (Y page 259). The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator tells you if the rear passengers have their seat belts fastened. The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator indicates the rear seat on which the belt is fastened. The ü symbol in the display indicates a fastened seat belt. If a seat belt is not fastened or if a seat is not occupied, the ý symbol is displayed. The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator appears in the multifunction display for around 30 seconds if: Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approximately 10 km/h. Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten their seat belts while the vehicle is in motion. Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and the vehicle drives off again. You can also cancel the rear seat belt status indicator immediately (Y page 231). i The status indicator for the rear-compartment seat belts is only available for certain countries. Belt tensioners, belt force limiters G WARNING If the seat belt tensioners have been triggered, they provide no additional protection in the event of another accident. Therefore, have belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 52 Children in the vehicle Safety Comply with safety regulations when disposing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can provide details of these regulations. ! If the front-passenger seat is not occu- pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be triggered in the event of an accident. The seat belts are fitted with belt tensioners. The belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body. Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. Belt tensioners do not pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is reduced. The belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronised with the front airbags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. This results in the force exerted on the occupant being distributed over a greater area. The belt tensioners can only be activated when: Rthe ignition is switched on. restraint systems are operational; see "SRS warning lamp" (Y page 41). Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on each of the three-point seat belts in front. Rthe R The belt tensioners on the seats in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. The belt tensioners are triggered depending on the type and severity of an accident: Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end col- lision the vehicle decelerates or acceler- ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side opposite the impact the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direction Rin certain situations where the vehicle overturns and the system determines that it can provide additional protection If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. Children in the vehicle Child restraint systems Important safety notes G WARNING To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under twelve years of age must always be secured in special child restraint systems on a suitable vehicle seat. This is necessary because the seat belts are not designed for children. RDo not drive with a child secured in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Exception: if the vehicle is equipped with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat and the child is secured in a child restraint system with transponders for automatic child seat recognition Rif you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Rchildren must never travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. Due to the forces which occur in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident, it would not be possible to restrain the child. The child could be thrown against parts of the vehicle interior and be seriously or even fatally injured. G WARNING The child restraint system cannot perform its protective function if it is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. The child could be seriously or even fatally injured. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. Child restraint systems should be fitted to the rear seats. Children are generally better protected there. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. Therefore, never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers. We recommend the use of child restraint systems which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. G WARNING Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. They could injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. They could also be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys- tem could heat up and the child could burn herself/himself on them. If a child opens a door, the child or other persons could be injured as a result. They could get out and injure themselves or be injured by a passing vehicle. Observe the general notes on the HOLD function, which can be found under the same keyword. G WARNING Unsecured or incorrectly positioned loads increase the risk of injury for children and all other occupants in the event of: Ran accident braking Ra sudden change of direction Do not transport heavy or hard objects in the vehicle interior unless they are secured. You will find further information under "Loading guidelines" in the index. Rsudden If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure the child using a child restraint system which is recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Ideally the child restraint system should be installed on a suitable rear seat. Make sure that the child is secured for the trip. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use the listed child restraint systems (Y page 60). You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products to clean child restraint systems. You can obtain information about this at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z 53 Safety Children in the vehicle 54 Children in the vehicle Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat G WARNING Safety If the front-passenger airbag is not disabled: Ra child secured in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat could be seriously and even fatally injured by the frontpassenger airbag deploying. This is especially a risk if the child is in the immediate vicinity of the front-passenger airbag when it deploys. Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Only secure a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Ralways move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position if you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger airbag is not disabled: Ron vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat Rin vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat, if no special child restraint system with transponders for automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat has been fitted Ron vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, if the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 4 is not lit. To make you aware of this danger, a corresponding warning sticker has been affixed on the dashboard and on both sides of the sun visor on the front-passenger side. Information about recommended child restraint systems is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat that is protected by an airbag installed in front of it. Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat G WARNING If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up when the child restraint system is fitted, the front-passenger airbag has not been disabled. If the frontpassenger airbag deploys, the child could be seriously or even fatally injured. Proceed as follows: Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Rfit or Children in the vehicle Ronly G WARNING Do not place electronic devices on the frontpassenger seat, e.g.: Rlaptops, when switched on phones Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access cards Signals from electronic equipment can cause interference in the automatic child seat recognition sensor system. This can lead to a system malfunction. This may cause the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp to light up without there being a child seat with transponders for automatic child seat recognition fitted. The front-passenger airbag will not then deploy during an accident. It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/or the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up briefly when you turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2. Rmobile Safety use a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position. Rhave the automatic child seat recognition checked at a qualified specialist workshop. To ensure that the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat functions/communicates correctly, never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system cannot perform its intended protective function in the event of an accident, and could lead to injuries. 55 If your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the front-passenger side. The sticker is visible when you open the front-passenger door. Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up briefly, but does not have any function. It does not indicate that there is automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat. The front-passenger seat sensor system for child restraint systems detects whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted. In this case, 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp : lights up. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled. Z 56 Children in the vehicle i If the front-passenger front airbag is dis- Safety abled by the automatic child seat recognition, the following remain enabled on the front-passenger side: Rthe sidebag pelvisbag Rthe windowbag Rthe belt tensioner Rthe ISOFIX child seat securing system for the rear seats G WARNING A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system does not provide sufficient protection for children weighing more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not secure children weighing more than 22 kg in a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint system with the vehicle seat belt as well. In addition, when fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. G WARNING Please note that if child restraint systems, or their retaining systems, are damaged or subjected to a load in an accident, they may not be able to provide their protective function. This could result in serious or even fatal injuries to the secured child in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. For this reason, have child restraint systems and their anchorages which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. When installing the ISOFIX child restraint system, fold protective caps ; of securing rings : inwards. X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when installing the ISOFIX child restraint system. ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing rings for two ISOFIX child restraint systems are fitted on the left and right of the rear seats. Children in the vehicle Top Tether anchorages Slide down head restraint : until it engages (Y page 99). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Make sure that Top Tether belt A is tight. X Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce the risk of injury even further. The Top Tether anchorage points are located in the rear compartment behind the head restraints. X Move head restraint : upwards. X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether anchorage =. X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted. X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. Z Safety Top Tether 57 Children in the vehicle 58 Safety Problems with child seat recognition Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is lit. A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front airbag has therefore been disabled as desired. The 4 PASSENGER G Risk of injury AIRBAG OFF indicator There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic lamp on the centre conchild seat recognition is malfunctioning. sole is lit. X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, or e.g.: The 6 warning lamp Rlaptop lights up and/or the Rmobile phone 4 PASSENGER AIRRcards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is still lit: briefly when you switch X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. the ignition on. Suitable positioning of the child restraint systems X To install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat: move the frontpassenger seat to the rearmost position and the belt outlet height to the lowest position. Key to the letters used in the following table: X Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category. U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this weight category. UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category. L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended, see the following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 60). Front-passenger seat Weight categories Frontpassenger airbag is not disabled: Frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. Category 0: up to 10 kg X U, L Category 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L Category I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L Group II: 15 to 25 kg UF, L U, L Group III: UF, L 22 to 36 kg U, L Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: a "Universal" category child restraint system with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition must be fitted when the frontpassenger airbag is disabled. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. Rear seats Weight categories Left, right Group 0: up to 10 kg U, L Category 0+: up to 13 kg U, L Category I: 9 to 18 kg U, L Category II: 15 to 25 kg U, L Group III: 22 to 36 kg U, L "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label. Example: approval label on the child restraint system Suitability of the rear seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems Key to the letters used in the following table: X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category and/or size category. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems that belong to the IL "Universal" category which are approved for use in this weight category. Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 60). Carry-cot weight category Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right F ISO/L1 X G ISO/L2 X Weight category 0: up to 10 kg, up to approximately 6 months Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right E ISO/R1 IL Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg, up to approximately 15 months Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right E ISO/R1 IL D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg, approximately 9 months to 4 years Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL B ISO/F2 IUF Z 59 Safety Children in the vehicle Children in the vehicle Safety 60 Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg, approximately 9 months to 4 years Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right ISO/F2X IUF Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer B1 A ISO/F3 IUF Type DUO PLUS DUO PLUS Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301133 04 301133 03 301133 04 301133 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 11 00 970 16 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes No Recommended child restraint systems When installing a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat: X Move the front-passenger seat to its lowest and rearmost position. Weight category 0: up to 10 kg, up to approximately 6 months Manufacturer Britax Römer Type BABY SAFE PLUS Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301146 04 301146 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 10 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg, up to approximately 15 months Weight category II/III: 15 to 36 kg, approximately 4 to 12 years Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer Type KID KID Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301148 04 301148 03 301148 04 301148 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 12 00 970 17 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes No Manufacturer Britax Römer Type BABY SAFE PLUS Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301146 04 301146 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 10 00 Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer Automatic child seat recognition Yes Type KIDFIX KIDFIX Approval number (E1 ...) 04 301198 04 301198 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 18 00 970 19 00 Approval number (E1 ...) 04 301146 – Automatic child seat recognition Yes No Order number B6 6 86 8224 – Automatic child seat recognition No – Suggested "Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems: Carry-cot weight category Category I: 9 to 18 kg Size categories F, G Size categories D, C, B, A Manufacturer – Manufacturer – Type – Type – Approval number (E1 ...) – Approval number (E1 ...) – Order number – Order number – Automatic child seat recognition – Automatic child seat recognition – Size category B1 Manufacturer Britax Römer Type DUO PLUS Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301133 04 301133 Order number A000 970 11 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes Category 0: up to 10 kg Size category E Manufacturer – Type – Approval number (E1 ...) – Order number – Automatic child seat recognition – Category 0+: up to 13 kg Size catego- E ries Child-proof locks D, C Manufacturer Britax Römer – Type BABY SAFE – ISOFIX PLUS 61 Safety Children in the vehicle Important safety notes G WARNING Activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors and the override switch for the rear windows when children are travelling in the vehicle. Otherwise, the children could open Z 62 Driving safety systems doors or side windows while the vehicle is in motion and injure themselves or others. Override feature for the rear side windows Safety G WARNING Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. They could injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. They could also be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint system could heat up and the child could burn herself/himself on them. If a child opens a door, the child or other persons could be injured as a result. They could get out and injure themselves or be injured by a passing vehicle. Also observe the notes on HOLD. Relevant information can be found in the index. Child-proof locks for the rear doors X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 63) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 63) RBAS PLUS(Brake Assist System PLUS) (Y page 64) RAdaptive brake lamps (Y page 65) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 65) REBD (electronic brake force distribution) (Y page 68) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 68) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 68) Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. i The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tyres and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tyres, recommended minimum tyre tread depths, etc. (Y page 328). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 261) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 232). ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h upwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. Brakes If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. X If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. BAS (Brake Assist System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Z 63 Safety Driving safety systems 64 Driving safety systems BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Safety tion (Y page 62). BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds greater than 7 km/h and uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h, BAS PLUS may also detect stationary obstacles, for example, stopped or parked vehicles. To prevent a front-end collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou approach an obstacle, and PLUS has detected a risk of collision If you are driving at a speed over 30 km/h: if you depress the brake sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic situation. If you are driving at a speed under 30 km/h: if you depress the brake, BAS PLUS is activated. Braking will be carried out at the last possible moment. If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. RBAS BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual, if: Ryou release the brake pedal. is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Rthere The radar sensor system is switched off automatically in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities in the following vehicles: Rvehicles with COMAND Online and navigation Rvehicles with Audio 20 and Becker® MAP PILOT Becker® MAP PILOT must be connected; see the separate operating instructions. The radar sensor system must be switched off using the on-board computer in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities in the following vehicles: Rvehicles without COMAND Online and navigation Rvehicles without Audio 20 and Becker® MAP PILOT Rvehicles for Australia For information on switching off the radar sensor system using the on-board computer, see (Y page 225). For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must: Rbe switched on (Y page 225) operational (Y page 245) If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS. Rbe G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Driving safety systems possibility of strong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Adaptive brake lamps If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning button (Y page 114). ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the igni- tion when the parking brake is being tested using a dynamometer. Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes on ESP® if the vehicle is being towed with the rear axle raised (Y page 322). ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 263) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 232). If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. Z Safety Rthe 65 Driving safety systems 66 If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Safety X i Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Traction control is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. On vehicles with 4MATIC, more drive torque is also transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active if you deactivate ESP®. Deactivating/activating ESP® (except AMG vehicles) G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. X To deactivate: (Y page 219). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To activate: (Y page 219). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel If you deactivate ESP®: Rin RESP® no longer improves driving stability. control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake. Rengine torque is not limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction. Rtraction Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG vehicles) Activating/deactivating SPORT handling mode G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following. Driving safety systems 67 To activate: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. handling mode is designed for driving on designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired. Driving in SPORT handling mode requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver who is able to cope with these critical driving conditions. X To deactivate: briefly press button :. The M handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X still provides support when you brake. Rengine torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction. Vehicles with the ECO start/stop function: the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle comes to a stop. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Deactivating/activating ESP® G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. It may be best to activate SPORT handling mode in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree. If SPORT handling mode is activated: Rin RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree. Rtraction control is still activated. X To deactivate: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷OFF message appears in the multifunction display. Deactivate ESP® when driving on designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired. Driving without ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced Z Safety RESP® Driving safety systems 68 Safety X driver who is able to cope with these critical driving conditions. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) To activate: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ON message appears in the multifunction display. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel If you deactivate ESP®: Rin RESP® no longer improves driving stability. control is still activated. RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available; it is also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RABS still provides support when you brake. Rengine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction. Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle comes to a stop. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Rtraction tion (Y page 62). G WARNING If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 261) as well as display messages (Y page 234). EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 179) and hill start assist (Y page 144). PRE-SAFE® Brake i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRESAFE® Brake detects a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. This function will issue a warning if: Rat speeds of around 30 km/h or more, over several seconds, the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient. The · distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. Rat a speed of approximately 7 km/h or higher, you very quickly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. From a speed of approximately 7 km/h, if the driver and passengers have fastened their seat belts, PRE-SAFE® Brake can brake the vehicle automatically at speeds up to approximately 200 km/h. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated driving conditions may cause unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake. You can prevent the intervention of the PRESAFE® Brake at any time by: Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further Ractivating kickdown Rreleasing the brake pedal. The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle. is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle. With the help of the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Rthere At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h,PRESAFE® Brake can also detect stationary obstacles such as stopped or parked vehicles. If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE® Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system will alert you both visually and acoustically. If you do not brake or take evasive action, the system will warn you by automatically braking the vehicle gently. If there is an increased risk of collision, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated (Y page 48). If, at speeds over 30 km/h, a risk of collision remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or significantly accelerate, automatic braking may be performed up to a level of automatic emergency braking. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an accident that can no longer be avoided. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you also brake. Automatic emergency braking cannot prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Z 69 Safety Driving safety systems 70 Anti-theft systems In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Safety Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Rto As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 219). When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, the Ä symbol appears in multifunction display, as long as the HOLD function is deactivated (Y page 179). On vehicles with the Active Parking Assist driving system, the Ä symbol is displayed when position P is engaged or you are driving faster than 35 km/h. For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on (Y page 225) and be operational. The radar sensor system is switched off automatically in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities in the following vehicles: Rvehicles with COMAND Online and navigation Rvehicles with Audio 20 and Becker® MAP PILOT Becker® MAP PILOT must be connected; see the separate operating instructions. The radar sensor system must be switched off using the on-board computer in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities in the following vehicles: Rvehicles without COMAND Online and navigation Rvehicles without Audio 20 and Becker® MAP PILOT Rvehicles for Australia For information on switching off the radar sensor system using the on-board computer, see (Y page 225). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Anti-theft systems Immobiliser To activate with the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. X The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid key has been left inside the vehicle. Anti-theft systems when you start the engine. ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. Tow-away protection Function An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This can occur if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. Activating To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. X A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Make sure that: Rthe doors are closed. Rthe boot lid is closed. Only then is the tow-away protection primed. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. Tow-away protection is primed after approximately 30 seconds. X Ra To deactivate Rthe X door vehicle with the emergency key element Rthe boot lid Rthe bonnet X To turn the alarm off with the key: press the % or & button on the key. The alarm is switched off. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is switched off automatically. Deactivating To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. Z Safety i The immobiliser is always deactivated 71 Anti-theft systems 72 Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. Tow-away protection is deactivated. Safety X Tow-away protection remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again and door is opened and closed again and Rthe vehicle is locked again To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the towaway protection if you lock your vehicle and it: Ra being transported being loaded onto a ferry or car transporter, for example Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a split-level garage Rthe doors are closed. sliding sunroof is closed. Rthe boot lid is closed. Only then is the interior motion sensor primed. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is primed after approximately 30 seconds. Rthe To deactivate X Ris Ris Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. The interior motion sensor is switched off automatically. Deactivating Interior motion sensor Function When the interior motion sensor is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. This can occur if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. Activating Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed. Rthe sliding sunroof is closed. Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hanging on the rear-view mirror or on the grab handles on the roof trim. This will prevent false alarms. X Make sure that: X Remove the key from the ignition lock. Press button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is deactivated. X X The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again and door is opened and closed again and Rthe vehicle is locked again Ra Anti-theft systems 73 To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and: Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle. side windows remain open. Rthe sliding sunroof remains open. Safety Rthe i UK only: your vehicle is equipped with a double lock function. The doors cannot be opened from the inside if the vehicle was locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 82). Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 82). Z 74 75 76 76 82 85 87 91 Opening and closing Useful information .............................. Key ....................................................... Doors .................................................... Boot ...................................................... Side windows ...................................... Sliding sunroof .................................... 76 Key Useful information Opening and closing i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 23). Key Important safety notes G WARNING Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people behind in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people requiring special assistance. As a result, they may not be able to free themselves in the event of an emergency. They could be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, for example. In this case, rescuing people from outside the vehicle is difficult. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any time, even if it has been locked Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been left in the vehicle Rrelease the parking brake They could thereby endanger themselves and others. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. G WARNING If a key ring is too heavy or too large, the weight acting on the key could cause it to turn in the ignition lock or catch on the steering wheel. This could cause the engine to be switched off suddenly. You may lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large key rings to the key that is inserted in the ignition. RDo not keep the key: with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key - with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil - inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the key's functionality. Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. - Key : & To lock the vehicle ; F To unlock the boot lid = % To unlock the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press the % button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe Rthe X Locking and unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the key with you. When you touch the surface of the sensors on the vehicle's outside door handles, KEYLESS-GO establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key. When the engine is started and whilst you are driving, KEYLESS-GO also checks whether a valid key is in the vehicle by periodically establishing radio contact. You can combine the KEYLESS-GO functions with those of a conventional key, e.g. using KEYLESS-GO to unlock and pressing the & button to lock. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 1 m. vehicle is locked again. anti-theft system is primed again. To lock centrally: press the & button. The key centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors boot lid Rthe fuel filler flap When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 225). When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 223). Rthe KEYLESS-GO General notes To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. X To unlock the boot lid: pull the handle on the boot lid. X Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 89). Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle. Z Opening and closing Key functions 77 Key 78 Opening and closing Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons on the key simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 79). i If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle The key now functions as follows: To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. X The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the frontpassenger door or the rear door. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X X Emergency key element General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door or the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 71). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: X To turn the alarm off with the key: press the % or & button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESSGO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle. or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The key must be outside the vehicle. If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the key into the ignition lock. Removing the emergency key element To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 79). : Release catch ; Emergency key element Key X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time, remove emergency key element ; from the key. 79 Checking the battery Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries are toxic and contain caustic substances. For this reason, keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery has been swallowed, visit a doctor immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Change the battery (Y page 79). i If the key battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: X Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle i You can get a battery in any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 78). : Battery compartment cover ; Emergency key element Z Opening and closing Battery of the key Key 80 Press emergency key element ; into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. When doing so, do not hold battery compartment cover : shut. X Remove battery compartment cover :. Opening and closing X = Battery Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free from lint, grease and all other forms of contamination. X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing and then press to close it. X Insert emergency key element ; into the key (Y page 78). X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X Key 81 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. If this does not work: X Check the key battery (Y page 79) and replace it if necessary (Y page 79). X Lock (Y page 84) or unlock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the emergency key element. The key is faulty. X Lock (Y page 84) or unlock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of using KEYLESS-GO. the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If this does not work: X Check the key battery (Y page 79) and replace it if necessary (Y page 79). X Lock (Y page 84) or unlock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the emergency key element. You have lost a key. Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X You have lost the emergency key element. X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Z Opening and closing Problems with the key Opening and closing 82 Doors Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be started using the key. the on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 318). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 319). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the key cannot be detected as easily. started using KEYLESS- X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again. GO. The key is in the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. Doors G WARNING Important safety notes If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any time, even if it has been locked Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been left in the vehicle Rrelease the parking brake They could thereby endanger themselves and others. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. G WARNING Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people behind in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people requiring special assistance. As a result, they may not be able to free themselves in the event of an emergency. They could be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, for example. In this case, rescuing people from outside the vehicle is difficult. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. Unlocking and opening the doors from the inside For all countries except the United Kingdom: you can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 71). United Kingdom only: if the vehicle has been locked with the key or with KEYLESSGO, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Deactivate the interior motion sensor (Y page 72) before you lock the vehicle. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 71). You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 62). X Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. X X To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO. The central locking/unlocking button does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. For all countries except the United Kingdom: you can open a front door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. United Kingdom only: if the vehicle has been locked with the key or with KEYLESSGO, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Deactivate the interior motion sensor (Y page 72) before you lock the vehicle. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. If the vehicle has been locked using the locking button for the central locking, or has been locked automatically, and a door is opened from the inside: Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. Ronly the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had been previously unlocked. Z 83 Opening and closing Doors Doors 84 Opening and closing Automatic locking feature 1 To unlock To deactivate: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X i If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer. You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 225). Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise to position 1. The door is unlocked. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 71). Rthe Unlocking the driver's door (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 78). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Locking the vehicle (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the key, use the emergency key element. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the boot lid. X Press the locking button (Y page 83). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 82). X Close the driver's door. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 78). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Boot 85 Vehicles without the boot lid remote closing feature: the boot lid can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside automatically from outside Ropened automatically from inside Runlocked with the emergency key element Vehicles with the boot lid remote closing feature: the boot lid can be: Ropened 1 Locking X Turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise. Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the boot lid are locked. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. and closed manually from outside Ropened and closed automatically from out- side Ropened and closed automatically from inside Runlocked with the emergency key element X Opening/closing from the outside To open Boot Important safety notes G WARNING Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior if the engine is running and the boot lid is open. This could poison you. Therefore, you should make sure that the boot lid is always closed when the engine is running. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. i Opening dimensions of the boot lid (Y page 366). X X Press the % button on the key. Pull handle :. To close G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the boot lid. Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out. Z Opening and closing Ropened Boot 86 G WARNING Opening and closing Monitor the boot lid opening and closing procedures to make sure that nobody can become trapped. To stop the opening or closing procedure, press the closing button on the boot lid again or pull the handle on the outside of the boot lid. ! The boot lid swings upwards when X X Pull the boot lid down using recess :. If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the key (Y page 77) or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 77). i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the boot, the boot lid cannot be locked. It then opens again. Opening/closing automatically from the outside Important safety notes G WARNING Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people behind in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people requiring special assistance. As a result, they may not be able to free themselves in the event of an emergency. They could be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, for example. In this case, rescuing people from outside the vehicle is difficult. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. i Opening dimensions of the boot lid (Y page 366). To open You can open the boot lid automatically using the key or the handle in the boot lid. X Press and hold the F button on the key until the boot lid opens. or X If the boot is unlocked, pull the boot lid handle and release it again immediately (Y page 85). To close Example: closing and locking button (vehicle with the boot lid remote closing feature and KEYLESSGO) : Closing button ; Locking button X To close: press closing button : on the boot lid. Side windows X Press locking button ; on the boot lid. i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the boot, the boot lid will not lock. Opening/closing automatically from the inside Important safety notes G WARNING Monitor the boot lid closing procedure to make sure that nobody can become trapped. Release the boot lid remote operating button to stop the closing procedure. Unlocking the boot (emergency key element) ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. If the boot cannot be unlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 71). X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 78). X Insert the emergency key element into the boot lid lock as far as the stop. i Opening dimensions of the boot lid (Y page 366). Opening and closing 1 Neutral position 2 To unlock Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise from position 1 as far as it will go to position 2. The boot is unlocked. X Turn the emergency key element back to position 1 and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X To open: pull remote operating switch for boot lid : until the boot lid opens. X To close: press remote operating switch for boot lid : until the boot lid is closed. X You can open the boot lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame Z Opening and closing Vehicles with the boot lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously close and lock the boot lid. 87 Opening and closing 88 Side windows when a side window is opened. Do not touch or lean against the side window during the opening procedure. You could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves down. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, release the switch or pull the switch upwards to close the side window again. Opening and closing the side windows The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close a side window. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, release the switch or press it again to open the side window again. G WARNING Children may injure themselves if they open or close the side windows. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. G WARNING Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could: Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts of the vehicle seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or extremely low temperatures If children open a door, they could: Rbe Rseriously or even fatally injure other people Rget out of the vehicle and injure themselves, or be seriously or even fatally injured by a passing vehicle Activate the child-proof locks/override feature if children are travelling in the vehicle. They could otherwise open doors or side windows while the vehicle is in motion and thereby injure themselves or others. : Front left ; Front right = Rear right ? Rear left Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open: press the corresponding switch. X To close: pull the corresponding switch. i If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. X i You can continue to operate the side windows after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. i The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 62). Side windows General notes You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the key is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: the vehicle the side windows Ropen the sliding sunroof Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat With KEYLESS-GO: Rrelease the sensor surface on the door han- dle. Rpull the door handle immediately and hold it. The side windows and the sliding sunroof open. Runlock Ropen i The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the key. The key must be close to the driver's door handle. Convenience opening feature Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are in the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. X When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose Rclose Using the key The key must be close to the driver's door handle. X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed. X Convenience closing feature Important safety notes G WARNING When using the convenience closing feature, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrapment: With the key: Rrelease the side windows the sliding sunroof To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Using KEYLESS-GO The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed. the & button. Rpress and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof open again. Z Opening and closing Convenience opening feature 89 Side windows 90 Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. Opening and closing X X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed. (Y page 88) X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 88). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. X Sliding sunroof 91 Problems with the side windows G WARNING Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. X X Remove the objects. Close the side window. A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again be closed and you can- slightly: not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Sliding sunroof G WARNING Important safety notes Children could injure themselves if they operate the sliding sunroof. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped when opening and closing the sliding sunroof. If there is a risk of entrapment, release the switch immediately. During automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction to stop the sliding sunroof. G WARNING The glass in the panorama sunroof could break in an accident. If you are not wearing a seat belt, there is a risk that you could be thrown through the opening in the event of the vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries. ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Z Opening and closing Closing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the side windows. Sliding sunroof 92 Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Opening and closing Operating the sliding sunroof Opening and closing Rain-closing feature If the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or if it is removed, the sliding sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain extreme outside temperatures Rafter six hours Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised in order to ventilate the vehicle interior. Rat i If the sliding sunroof is obstructed while being closed by the rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain-closing feature is then deactivated. The sliding sunroof does not close if: Rit Overhead control panel : To raise ; To open = To close/lower Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or close the sun protection cover manually when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. X i You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. is raised at the rear. is blocked. Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor, e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport. Rit Resetting ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move smoothly. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear (Y page 92). X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again (Y page 92). X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Sliding sunroof 93 Problems with the sliding sunroof G WARNING Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens not be closed and you again slightly: cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Z Opening and closing You could be severely or even fatally injured when closing the sliding sunroof with increased closing force or if the anti-entrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the sliding sunroof. 94 95 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Useful information .............................. 96 Correct driver's seat position ............ 96 Seats .................................................... 97 Steering wheel .................................. 102 Mirrors ............................................... 105 Memory function .............................. 107 Correct driver's seat position 96 Useful information Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 23). Correct driver's seat position Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. Ryou have set the seat angle so that your thighs are gently supported. Ryou can depress the pedals properly. X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly. When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 102). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjusting the steering wheel manually (Y page 103) Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 103) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. Ryou can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 48). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 49). The seat belt should: Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 97). X Make sure that seat = is adjusted properly. Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 98) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: X Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. Rfit snugly across your body routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions (Y page 105). X Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror Rbe Seats Seats Important safety notes G WARNING The seats can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could adjust the seats and become trapped. G WARNING Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted from the road and traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the seat moving. This could cause an accident. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or others could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could unintentionally press the buttons to electrically adjust the seats and become trapped. Take care that: Rwhile moving the seats, your hands do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. Rchildren in the vehicle do not slide their hands under the levers. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped when adjusting the seats. Observe the notes on airbags. Secure children as recommended; see the "Children in the vehicle" section. G WARNING Make sure that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the central area of the head restraint. If your head is not supported correctly by the head restraint, you could suffer a severe neck injury in the event of an accident. Never drive if the head restraints are not engaged and set correctly. G WARNING A seat belt can only offer its intended degree of protection when the backrest is almost vertical and the occupant is sitting upright. Avoid seat positions that do not allow the seat belt to be routed correctly. Adjust the backrest so that it is as upright as possible. Never travel with the backrest reclined too far backwards. You could otherwise be seriously or even fatally injured in the event of an accident or sudden braking. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors settings with the memory function (Y page 107). 97 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 98 Seats heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care". Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment A Backrest angle i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE- SAFE® has been triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavourable position. i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 107). i Vehicles with the through-loading feature and memory function: if you fold down a rear seat backrest, the respective front seat is moved forwards slightly if necessary. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when moving the seat back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i Vehicles with memory function: when the seat is moved forwards or backwards, the headrest is moved up or down automatically. i The head restraints in the front seats are fitted with the NECK-PRO system (Y page 46). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. i Further related subjects: RRear Adjusting the head restraints Adjusting the head restraints manually Adjusting the head restraint height bench seat through-loading feature Adjusting the seats electrically To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X : Head restraint height ; Seat cushion angle = Seat height Seats 99 To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right and/or lefthand side bolster : into the desired position. X To adjust the angle of the head restraint: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow ;. X X Push or pull the lower edge of the head restraint in the direction of the arrow. Adjusting the head restraints electrically Rear seat head restraints Adjusting the rear seat head restraint angle X To adjust the head restraint height: slide switch for head restraint adjustment : up or down in the direction of the arrow. Adjusting the luxury head restraints G WARNING When folding back the head restraint side bolsters, do not put your hands between the side bolster and the cushion holder. There is a danger of becoming trapped. X Pull or push the top of the head restraint until it is in the desired position. Removing and fitting the rear seat head restraints G WARNING Occupants should only travel sitting on seats that have the head restraints fitted. This reduces the risk of injury to the occupant in the event of an accident. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the angle of the head restraints Seats 100 ! Make sure that the rear window roller sunblind is retracted when removing the rear head restraints. Otherwise, you could damage the roller sunblind. You can adjust the contour of the front seats individually so as to provide optimum support for your back and sides. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the active multicontour seat Overview To remove: pull the head restraint up as far as it will go. X Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To refit: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. X : To adjust the seat cushion length ; To switch the dynamic function on or off = To adjust the side bolsters of the seat backrest ? To switch the massage function on or off Adjusting the multicontour seat A To adjust the contour of the backrest to increase/decrease support B To adjust the height/depth of the back- rest contour The active multicontour seat automatically adapts the sides of the backrest to your current driving style. Dynamic function : To adjust the thigh cushion ; To adjust the backrest contour in the lum- bar region = To adjust the backrest contour in the upper back region ? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat backrest The dynamic function adjusts the air cushions in the side bolsters of the seat backrests to ensure ideal lateral support at all times. Seats To switch on: press button ; once or twice until the desired level is set. One or two indicator lamps in button ; light up. X To switch off: press button ; repeatedly until all indicator lamps in button ; go out. X 101 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Level 1 (one indicator lamp) Level 2 (two indicator lamps) Standard setting: slightly increased lateral support and slow build-up of air pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest. Sport setting: increased lateral support and fast build-up of pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest. Massage function (PULSE) The massage function helps you to prevent muscle tension on long journeys. You can choose between two levels. X To switch on: press button ? once or twice until the desired level is set. One or two indicator lamps in button ? light up. The air cushions in the lumbar region vibrate for approximately 20 minutes. : To raise the backrest contour ; To soften the backrest contour = To lower the backrest contour ? To harden the backrest contour You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off G WARNING Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level 3 may result in excessive seat temperatures. The health of passengers that have limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. Therefore, do not use seat heating level 3 repeatedly. Adjusting the lumbar support You can adjust the contour of the driver's seat so as to provide optimum support for your back. X Move adjustment lever : in the direction of the arrow until the desired backrest contour is achieved. Driver's and front-passenger seat Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors You can choose between two different levels. Steering wheel Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 102 The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat Problems with the seat ventilation heating may switch off. Problems with the seat heating The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 89). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. The seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Steering wheel Important safety notes Switching the seat ventilation on/off Switching on/off G WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or driving without the steering wheel adjustment feature locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. The electrical steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated at any time. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel manually 103 i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 104) RStoring settings (Y page 107) Steering wheel heating : Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height = To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. X Adjusting the steering wheel electrically Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow : or ;. Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you remove the key from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is switched off. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is switched off. i The steering wheel heating does not switch off automatically. : To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Switching on/off Steering wheel 104 Problems with the steering wheel heating If steering wheel heating indicator lamp = is flashing, the steering wheel heating has switched off automatically. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel heating will switch back on automatically. EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Important safety notes G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment procedure. To halt the procedure: Rpress the steering column adjustment button. Rbriefly press one of the memory function position buttons. The steering column stops moving immediately. Do not keep the memory function position button pressed down, otherwise the memory function will start and the steering wheel and seat will begin to move. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the EASYENTRY feature and become trapped. The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (Y page 226). Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The steering wheel tilts upwards if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is in position 1 Ropen the driver's door and the key is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock Ropen i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop. Position of the steering wheel for driving The steering wheel is moved to the previously set position if: Rthe Ryou driver's door is closed and insert the key into the ignition lock or Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. If you close the driver's door with the key inserted into the ignition lock, the steering wheel is automatically moved to the previously set position. The last position of the steering wheel is stored when you switch off the ignition or when you store the setting with the memory function (Y page 107). Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the key in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. Mirrors Mirrors Rear-view mirror X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle switch : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button : for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button = up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. X The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. The exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window heating is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects are actually closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from vehicles driving behind and cause an accident, e.g. when changing lane. For this reason, make sure of the actual distance from the vehicle driving behind by glancing over your shoulder. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. X Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer. 105 Mirrors Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 106 Setting the exterior mirrors Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 227). X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. G WARNING Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 227): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door. i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out. Exterior mirror pushed out of position If incident light from headlamps is prevented from striking the sensor in the rear-view mirror, for instance, by luggage piled too high in the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-dazzle function will not operate. Incident light could then blind you. This may distract you from the traffic conditions and, as a result, you may cause an accident. The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antidazzle mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on and light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror. The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Rincident Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position Using reverse gear If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button : until you hear a click and then the mirrors engage in position (Y page 105). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 105). X You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. Memory function Using the memory button You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ?. Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X With the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the kerb should be visible. X Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. X Calling up a stored parking position setting Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button ;. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: X Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 15 km/h Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Memory function Storing settings G WARNING Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. You could otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions by the steering wheel and seat moving of their own accord, and as a result, cause an accident. G WARNING The memory function can still be used when the key has been removed. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could otherwise become trapped when adjusting the seat or the steering wheel. With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Ractive multicontour seat: seat cushion length, lateral cushions of the seat backZ Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. X 107 Memory function 108 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors rest, contour of the backrest, dynamic function level Rdriver's side: steering wheel position Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Adjust the seat (Y page 98). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 103) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 105). X Press the M memory button and then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Calling up a stored setting Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. X 109 110 110 118 119 121 Lights and windscreen wipers Useful information ............................ Exterior lighting ................................ Interior lighting ................................. Replacing bulbs ................................. Windscreen wipers ........................... 110 Exterior lighting Useful information "extended range foglamps" functions (Intelligent Light System) are not available. i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Lights and windscreen wipers ist workshops: (Y page 23). Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using the: Rlight switch Rcombination Ron-board switch (Y page 113) computer (Y page 222) Light switch Exterior lighting Operation Important safety notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Driving abroad Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps If your journey takes you to countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered, your headlamps must be switched to symmetrical dipped beam. This prevents oncoming traffic from being dazzled. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an area of the edge of the carriageway. Convert the headlamps as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries (Y page 223). Asymmetrical dipped beam Convert the headlamps back to asymmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border (Y page 223). If the headlamps are converted to symmetrical dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and 1W Left-hand parking lamps 2X Right-hand parking lamps 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps BR Rear foglamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to Ã. The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/ parking lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock the driver's door with the key in position 0 Ropen Exterior lighting G WARNING If the light switch is set to Ã and it is foggy, snowing or there is poor visibility, the dippedbeam headlamps will not come on automatically. This could endanger you and others. In such situations turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. ically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. The daytime driving lights improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. Here, the daytime driving lights function must be switched on via the on-board computer (Y page 222). When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and the daytime driving lights go out or are dimmed. Dipped-beam headlamps G WARNING 1W Left-hand parking lamps 2X Right-hand parking lamps 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- If the light switch is set to Ã and it is foggy, snowing or there is poor visibility, the dippedbeam headlamps will not come on automatically. This could endanger you and others. In such situations turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. ment cluster lighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps BR Rear foglamp Ã is the preferred light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): 1W Left-hand parking lamps RKey 2X Right-hand parking lamps in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the engine running: if you have activated the daytime driving lights function via the on-board computer, the daytime driving lights or the dipped-beam headlamps and side lamps are switched on or off automat- 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps BR Rear foglamp Z Lights and windscreen wipers Automatic headlamp mode 111 112 Exterior lighting Lights and windscreen wipers Even if the light sensor does not detect that is dark, the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps switch on when the key is inserted into the ignition lock and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. X To switch on the dipped-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Rear foglamp Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Side lamps ! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the side lamps or parking lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T side lamps for several hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left parking lamp. 1W Left-hand parking lamps 2X Right-hand parking lamps 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 1W Left-hand parking lamps 2X Right-hand parking lamps 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- The rear foglamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of heavy fog. Please take note of the countryspecific regulations for the use of rear foglamps. X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X lamps BR Rear foglamp ment cluster lighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps BR Rear foglamp To switch on: turn light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Exterior lighting Parking lamps 113 Combination switch 1W Left-hand parking lamps 2X Right-hand parking lamps 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps BR Rear foglamp Switching on the parking lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the parking lamps: the key is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). : Main-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = Headlamp flasher ? Turn signal, left To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X Main-beam headlamps : Main-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = Headlamp flasher ? Turn signal, left Z Lights and windscreen wipers Turn signals Exterior lighting 114 To switch on the main-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the Ã position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the main-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls activation of the main-beam headlamps (Y page 116). Lights and windscreen wipers X Headlamp flasher Hazard warning lamps To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. X The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if: Ran airbag is deployed. vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of more than 70 km/h and comes to a standstill. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of over 10 km/h again after a full brake application. Rthe i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. : Main-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = Headlamp flasher ? Turn signal, left To switch on: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. X Headlamp cleaning system The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated five times (Y page 121) while the lights are on and the engine is running. When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. Exterior lighting Intelligent Light System 115 Cornering light function The Intelligent Light System is a system that adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the prevailing driving and weather conditions. It offers advanced functions for improved illumination of the road surface, e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or weather conditions. The system includes the active light function, cornering light function, motorway mode and extended range foglamps. The system is only active when it is dark. You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent Light System" using the on-board computer (Y page 222). Active light function The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to recognise pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Active: when the lights are switched on. you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h and the turn signal is activated or the steering wheel is turned. Rif you are driving at speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and turn the steering wheel. Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 40 km/h or switch off the turn signal or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Motorway mode Z Lights and windscreen wipers General notes 116 Exterior lighting Active: if you are driving at a speed above 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for at least 1000 m or if you are driving at a speed above 130 km/h. Not active: if you are driving at speeds below 80 km/h following activation. Lights and windscreen wipers Extended range foglamps The extended range foglamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. Active: if you are driving at speeds below 70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp. Not active: if, following activation, you are driving at speeds above 100 km/h or if you switch off the rear foglamp. The system may not recognise the following road users: Rroad users that have no lighting, e.g. pedes- trians users that have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rroad users whose lighting is not clearly visible, e.g. road users behind a crash barrier Ron rare occasions: road users that have lights that may be recognised too late or not at all The automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated, or they may be activated despite road users travelling in front of or approaching the vehicle. Thus, you could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Always observe traffic conditions and, if necessary, dip the lights manually. Rroad Adaptive Highbeam Assist Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. The driver is responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, vision and traffic conditions. The system may be impaired or deactivated: Rif there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rif the area of the windscreen around the optical sensor is dirty, misted up or covered up, e.g. by a sticker You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between dipped beam and main beam automatically. The system recognises vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or travelling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from main beam to dipped beam. The system automatically adapts the dippedbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the main-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off the main-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below 45 km/h or other road users are recognised or the roads are adequately lit: the main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To deactivate: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Headlamps misted up on the inside The headlamps may mist up on the inside if there is high atmospheric humidity. : Main-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = Headlamp flasher ? Turn signal, left To activate: activate the Adaptive Highbeam Assist function using the on-board computer (Y page 223). X Turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow : . The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up if it is dark and the light sensor activates the dipped-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above 45 km/h: the headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above 55 km/h and no other road users are recognised: X Switch on the lights and drive off. The level of moisture diminishes, depending on the length of the journey and the weather conditions (humidity and temperature). If the level of moisture does not diminish: X X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 117 Lights and windscreen wipers Exterior lighting 118 Interior lighting Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Interior lighting control General notes Lights and windscreen wipers In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The colour and brightness of the ambient lighting may be set using the on-board computer (Y page 223). Automatic interior lighting control Front overhead control panel : u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off = p Switches the right-hand front read- ing lamp on/off ? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off A p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on/off Front overhead control panel : u To switch the rear interior lighting on/off ; | To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off = p To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off ? c To switch the front interior lighting on/off A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off Rear-compartment overhead control panel : p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off ; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off X To activate/deactivate: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel. Replacing bulbs Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rremove the key from the ignition lock The interior lighting is activated for a short time when the key is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 224). Manual interior lighting control Crash-responsive emergency lighting The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button. or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the key. Replacing bulbs Important safety notes Xenon bulbs G DANGER Front overhead control panel : u To switch the rear interior lighting on/off. Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. If you touch the electrical contacts of a xenon bulb, you could suffer an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured. For this reason, do not remove the cover of xenon bulbs. Do not change the xenon bulbs yourself, but have them replaced at a qualified workshop. = p To switch the right-hand reading Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. ? c To switch the front interior lighting LED lamps ; | To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off lamp on/off on/off A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off To switch the front interior lighting on/ off: press the c button. X To switch the rear interior lighting on/ off: press the u button. X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button. X You can neither replace xenon bulbs nor LED bulbs. Have LED bulbs changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Other bulbs G WARNING Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You should therefore allow them to cool down before you Z Lights and windscreen wipers The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: 119 Lights and windscreen wipers 120 Replacing bulbs change them. Otherwise, you could be burned if you touch them. Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Otherwise, they could damage the bulbs, for example, and injure themselves. Never use a bulb which has been dropped. Such a bulb may break or even explode and injure you. Halogen bulbs are pressurised and can explode when you change them, particularly if they are very hot. You should therefore wear eye protection and gloves when you are changing them. There are bulbs other than xenon and LED bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 120). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with your bare hands. Even minor contamination can burn into the glass surface and reduce the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lintfree cloth or only touch the base of the bulb when fitting. Only use bulbs of the correct type. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs You can replace the following bulbs. The details for the bulb type can be found in the legend. Tail lamps : Reversing lamp: W 16 W Replacing the rear bulbs Reversing lamp Lamp cluster Switch off the lights. Open the boot. X Reach up into the side panelling and pull downwards until the lamp cluster is easily accessible. X Press the detent of connector ; and pull out connector ;. X Use a suitable tool to loosen and remove four nuts :. X Remove the entire lamp cluster. X Turn bulb holder = anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Pull out the bulb. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder =. X X Windscreen wipers 121 Insert bulb holder = into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Reinsert the lamp cluster. X Tighten four nuts :. X Push in connector ; until it engages. X Insert the side panelling. X Switching the windscreen wipers on/ off G WARNING The windscreen will not longer be wiped properly if the wiper blades are worn. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and autumn. ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windscreen wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate them using washer fluid. ! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on the windscreen after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, this may be due to wax or other residue. Clean the windscreen with washer fluid after an automatic car wash. ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windscreen becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. Combination switch 1 $ Windscreen wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/ î To wipe the windscreen using washer fluid Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. X In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windscreen wipers to wipe more frequently. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING The wiper arms could start moving and cause an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers switched on. Remove the key from the ignition lock before replacing the wiper blades. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers 122 Lights and windscreen wipers ! Never open the bonnet if a windscreen wiper arm has been folded away from the windscreen. Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen. Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windscreen, the windscreen may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. Replacing the wiper blades Removing the wiper blades X Remove the key from the ignition lock or turn the key to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO). X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. Fitting the wiper blades X Position the new wiper blade in the retainer on the wiper arm and slide it into place in the opposite direction to the arrow. The wiper blade audibly engages. X Make sure that wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. Problems with the windscreen wipers The windscreen wipers are obstructed X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. or Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. X The windscreen wipers are inoperative The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X X Firmly press release knob : and pull the wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. 123 124 124 127 136 Climate control Useful information ............................ Overview of climate control systems ................................................... Operating the climate control system ..................................................... Adjusting the air vents ..................... 124 Overview of climate control systems Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Climate control ist workshops: (Y page 23). Overview of climate control systems Important safety notes G WARNING Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control is only operational when the engine is running. The system only works optimally if the side windows and the roof are closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 132). i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 89). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter can filter out most particles of dust and completely filters out pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. Overview of climate control systems 125 Climate control Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone) : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 128) ; Demists the windscreen (Y page 130) = Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 130) ? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127) A Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 131) B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 128) C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 131) D Sets the air distribution (Y page 129) E Increases the airflow (Y page 129) F Reduces the airflow (Y page 129) G Switches climate control on/off (Y page 127) H Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 128) Information about using THERMATIC automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of THERMATIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the Ã and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above the Ã and ¿ buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the demisting function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use the air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp above the á button goes out. Z 126 Overview of climate control systems Climate control Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (3-zone) Front control panel : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 128) ; Demists the windscreen (Y page 130) = Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 132) ? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127) A Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 131) B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 128) C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 130) D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 127) E Sets the air distribution (Y page 129) F Increases the airflow (Y page 129) G Reduces the airflow (Y page 129) H Sets the climate mode (Y page 128) I Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 131) J Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 128) Rear control panel K Increases the airflow (Y page 129) L Reduces the airflow (Y page 129) M Display N To reduce the temperature (Y page 128) O To increase the temperature (Y page 128) Operating the climate control system The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the Ã and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above the Ã and ¿ buttons light up. RIn automatic mode, you can also use the ñ button to set a climate mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is recommended. RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the demisting function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use the air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp above the á button goes out. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. Switching on/off Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press the Ã button. The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. X To switch off: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. X Activating/deactivating the cooling with air dehumidification function Points to observe before use G WARNING If the "cooling with air dehumidification" function is deactivated, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled (during warm weather) or dehumidified. The windows could mist up more quickly. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Points to observe before use The cooling with air dehumidification function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. i If climate control is switched off, the air i The cooling with air dehumidification Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off supply and air circulation are also switched off. Only use this setting for a brief period. The windows could otherwise mist up. i Switch on climate control primarily using function uses refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant does not contain chlorofluorocarbons, and therefore does not damage the ozone layer. the Ã button (Y page 128). Z Climate control Information about using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control 127 Operating the climate control system 128 Switching on/off X To activate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature. or X Climate control Problems with the cooling with air dehumidification function When you press the ¿ button, the indicator lamp in the button flashes three times or remains off. You can no longer switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Setting climate control to automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. Automatic mode will achieve optimal operation if cooling with air dehumidification is also activated. If desired, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the Ã button. The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. i THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: when automatic mode is activated, you can select a climate mode (Y page 128). X To switch off: press the _ button. Press the I or K button. The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes out. Setting the climate mode In automatic mode you can select the following climate modes: FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly cooler MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly warmer and with less of a draught Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the Ã button. X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the desired climate mode appears in the display. X Setting the temperature THERMATIC automatic climate control Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: turn control : or B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 125). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X Operating the climate control system THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control zones You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce the temperature in the front: turn controls : and B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 126). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the front control panel: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. X Turn control : clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 126). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the rear compartment and the front-passenger side. X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the rear control panel: press the r or s button on the rear control panel. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents S Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents b Directs the airflow through the demister, centre and side air vents (only for certain countries). a Directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents _ Directs the airflow through the demister vents, the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards. Adjusting Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the _ button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. X Setting the airflow Adjusting Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase: press the K button. X To reduce: press the I button. X i You can use THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control to set the airflow in the rear compartment separately. Z Climate control THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control 129 Operating the climate control system 130 Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off Switching the ZONE function on/off To switch on: press the á button. The indicator lamp above the á button lights up. THERMATIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment. X To switch off: press the á button. The indicator lamp above the á button goes out. THERMATIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment. Climate control X X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. The heating with air dehumidification function remains on. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or X Press the Ã button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Turn controls : or B clockwise or anticlockwise (Y page 125) (THERMATIC automatic climate control), (Y page 126) (THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control ). or X Press the K or I button. Demisting the windscreen You can use this function to demist the windscreen or to demist the inside of the windscreen and the side windows. Switch off the "demisting" function as soon as the windscreen is clear again. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rheating with dehumidification on airflow (depending on the outside temperature) Rhigh temperature (depending on the outside temperature) Rhigh Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the demisting function (Y page 130). i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X Windows misted up on the outside Press the _ button repeatedly until the P or O symbol appears in the display. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X Rear window heating Switching on/off G WARNING Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could endanger you and others. The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. It otherwise switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. Problems with the rear window heating The rear window heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be activated. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps or interior lighting. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating is activated again automatically. Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode G WARNING Only switch over to air-recirculation mode briefly at low outside temperatures. Otherwise, the windows could mist up, thus impairing visibility and endangering yourself and others. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. 1 You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. The operation of air-recirculation mode is the same for all control panels. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. i In the event of high pollution levels1 or at high outside temperatures, air-recirculation mode is automatically activated. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp above the g button does not light up. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. To deactivate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically: X Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 5† Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 5† Convenience opening/closing using the air-recirculation button G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side windows are opened and closed. Make sure that all objects and body parts are clear of the side windows when they are being THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control only. Z 131 Climate control Operating the climate control system Operating the climate control system 132 opened or closed. You or the objects could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the window moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, operate the W switch to move the side window in the opposite direction. Make sure that nobody can become trapped as the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof is opened and closed. If there is a risk of entrapment, operate the 3 switch to move the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof in the opposite direction. Convenience closing feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof are closed. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. X Convenience opening feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof are opened. The side windows and the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof move back to their original position. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. Climate control X i If you open the side windows or the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof manually after closing them with the convenience closing feature, they will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. Activating/deactivating the residual heat function The residual heat function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the temperature that has been set for the vehicle interior. X To activate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. X To deactivate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes out. i It is possible that the residual heat func- tion may be activated automatically an hour after the key has been removed. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30minutes to dry the air-conditioning system. Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rwhen Auxiliary heating Important safety notes G WARNING Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxiliary heating is in operation. Inhaling these exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in confined spaces without an extraction system, e.g. a garage. G WARNING When operating the auxiliary heating parts of the vehicle can get very hot. Make sure that the exhaust system does not under any circumstances come into contact with easily ignitable material such as dry grass or fuels. The material could otherwise ignite and set Operating the climate control system ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes. The auxiliary heating heats the air in the passenger compartment to the selected temperature. It does not use the heat of the running engine to do this. The auxiliary heating is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the tank content must be at least at reserve fuel level to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heating could switch from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode. The auxiliary heating switches off automatically after 50 minutes. This time limit can be altered. To do this, visit a qualified specialist workshop. You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Before switching on The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated or deactivated using the remote control or the button on the centre console. The on-board computer can be used to specify up to three departure times, one of which may be preselected (Y page 225). Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the centre console button The colours of the indicator lamps on the button have the following meanings: Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched on Red Auxiliary heating switched on Yellow Departure time preselected (Y page 225) Climate control the vehicle alight. Choose your parking spot accordingly. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus prohibited at filling stations or when your vehicle is being refuelled. You must therefore switch off the auxiliary heating at filling stations. Switch in the centre console To switch the auxiliary heating/ventilation on: press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : lights up. X To switch the auxiliary heating/ventilation off: press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : goes out. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the temperature. Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the remote control The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated even when climate control is set to manual. Optimum comfort can be attained when the system is set to automatic mode. Set the temperature to 22 †. Points to observe before use Your vehicle comes with one remote control. You may use two additional remote controls for your vehicle. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. X 133 Z 134 Operating the climate control system The remote control has a maximum range of approximately 300 metres. This range is reduced by: Rsources of radio interference objects between the remote control and the vehicle Rthe remote control being in an unfavourable position in relation to the vehicle Rtransmitting from an enclosed space Rsolid i The optimum range can be achieved if you Climate control hold the remote control vertically, pointing upwards when you press one of the buttons. i A battery symbol appears in the display when the battery in the remote control is low. Replace the remote control battery (Y page 135). Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off To switch on: press the u button. ON is shown in the remote control display. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. X Checking the status of the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the , or . button. The following messages may appear in the display: Display Meaning The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is switched off. The auxiliary ventilation is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. The auxiliary heating is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. Auxiliary heating remote control : Display ; . To check the status/set the depar- ture time = ^ To switch off the auxiliary heating/ ventilation ? u To switch on the auxiliary heating/ ventilation A , To check the status/set the depar- ture time A departure time has been activated. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary ventilation is currently selected. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary heating is currently selected. The departure time appears in the display. Operating the climate control system X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The new departure time is stored. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Climate control Setting the departure time X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears in the display. X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The Î symbol in the remote control display flashes. X Press the , or . button to set the desired departure time. i The longer you press the , or . button, the faster the time changes. Activating the set departure time X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the desired departure time appears in the display. X Press the u button. The Í symbol and the departure time appear in the display. Deactivating a set departure time X Press the , or . button. The status of the auxiliary heating is shown in the display. X Press the . button. The first departure time stored appears in the display. X Press the ^ button. The display message OFF appears in the display. Replacing the remote control battery G WARNING Batteries contain poisonous substances. Swallowing/ingesting batteries can result in serious personal injury or death. Always keep batteries away from children. If a battery is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. 135 One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is required. X Prise apart the side arms of battery cover ; and pull off battery cover ;. X Remove old battery :. X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity signs on the back of the remote control when doing so. X Slide battery cover ; back onto the remote control. X Use the remote control to check the vehicle's auxiliary heating functions. Z 136 Adjusting the air vents Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions FAIL The starter battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is faulty. X Charge the starter battery. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. $ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off using the remote control. Climate control FAIL © FAIL There is not enough fuel in the fuel tank, or the auxiliary heating is faulty. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: G WARNING Rkeep Adjusting the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the vents. Keep bare skin away from these air outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away to a different area of the vehicle interior. the air inlet between the windscreen and the bonnet free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior. Adjusting the air vents Setting the centre air vents 137 midification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove compartment could be damaged. : Centre air vent, left = Centre vent thumbwheel, right ? Centre vent thumbwheel, left X To open/close: turn thumbwheels = and ? up or down. Setting the side air vents : Air vent thumbwheel ; Air vent When automatic climate control is activated, the glove compartment can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : clockwise or anti-clockwise. Setting the rear-compartment air vents Setting the centre vents in the rear compartment X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or down. i Side window demister vent : is only open when side air vent ; is open. Setting the glove compartment air vent ! Close the air vent when heating the vehi- cle. At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu- : Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel ; Rear-compartment air vent, right Z Climate control ; Centre air vent, right Adjusting the air vents 138 = Rear control unit, only with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control ? Rear-compartment air vent, left Climate control X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or down. Useful information ............................ Running-in notes ............................... Driving ............................................... Automatic transmission ................... Refuelling ........................................... Parking ............................................... Driving tips ........................................ Driving systems ................................ 140 140 140 148 156 159 161 165 Driving and parking 139 140 Driving Useful information Driving and parking i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- After 1500 km, you may gradually accelerate the vehicle to full road and engine speeds. Additional running-in notes for AMG vehicles: RDo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for the first 1500 km. allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4500 rpm briefly. ROnly i You should also observe these notes on running in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. ist workshops: (Y page 23). Running-in notes Important safety notes New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1,500 km If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, you will be rewarded with excellent performance for the remainder of the engine's life. RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km. RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle. RChange gear in good time, before the rev counter needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the rev counter. RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). RThe shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 should only be engaged when driving slowly, e.g. when driving in mountainous terrain. AMG vehicles with rear axle differential lock Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. Change the oil after a running-in period of 3000 km to improve protection of the rear axle differential. This oil change will lengthen the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardised. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Fit the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers Rshoes Driving There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Key positions Key Driving and parking G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Rlose ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only set the automatic transmission to the respective drive positions when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train. ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures (below +20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. 141 g To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine i If the key does not belong to the vehicle, it can still be turned in the ignition lock. However, the ignition will not be switched on. The engine cannot be started. KEYLESS-GO General notes RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together with: - electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key - metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together in metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a key featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO start function and a detachable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the key must be in the vehicle. Z Driving Driving and parking 142 Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. Removing the Start/Stop button Key positions with KEYLESS-GO X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the key. i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop Switching on the power supply Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windscreen wipers, for example. i If you then open the driver's door when in this position, the power supply is deactivated. Switching on the ignition X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. i The ignition is switched off if: X Rthe driver's door is open and press Start/Stop button : once when in this position. Ryou button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. i When you insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use Start/Stop button :. Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. General notes i The catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30seconds after a cold start. The Driving mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. sound of the engine may change during this time. X Shift the transmission to position P. The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P. i You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N. Starting procedure with the key i To start the engine using the key instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. To start a petrol engine: turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 141) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 141). The % preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X When the % erlischt, den Schlüssel auf Stellung 3(Y page 141) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X i You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm. Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine G WARNING Your vehicle can be started using a valid KEYLESS-GO key. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. i The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the key into the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. This Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X To start a petrol engine: press the Start/ Stop button (Y page 141) once. The engine starts. X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/ Stop button (Y page 141) once. Preglow is activated and the engine starts. X Pulling away Automatic transmission G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Release the parking brake (Y page 160). X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. X i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 225). Z Driving and parking Automatic transmission 143 144 Driving i Upshifts take place at higher engine Driving and parking speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Hill start assist G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. X Take your foot off the brake pedal. The vehicle is then held for about a second. X Pull away. Hill start assist will not function if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient. Rthe transmission is in position N. Rthe parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. ECO start/stop function Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. General notes The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Every time you switch on the engine using the key or the Start/Stop button, the ECO start/ stop function is activated. AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program C. The system is operational when ECO symbol ¤ is shown in green in the multifunction display. AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multifunction display additionally shows the Stop/ Start active message. If conditions for automatic engine switch-off have not been fulfilled (Y page 145), the ¤ symbol will be shown in yellow. AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multifunction display additionally shows the Stop/ Start inactive message. If the ECO start/stop function has been manually deactivated (Y page 145) or a malfunction has caused the system to be deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not displayed. AMG vehicles: in the AMG menu on the multifunction display, the Stop/Start active or Stop/Start inactive display message disappears. If the engine is switched off and the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the engine has been switched off automatically. However, all vehicle systems remain active. Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function ECO button To switch off (except AMG vehicles): press button :. Indicator lamp ; on button : and the ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go out. X To switch on (except AMG vehicles): press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 145) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 145) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. X X To switch off (AMG vehicles): press button : in drive program C. or X Switch to drive program S, S+ or M (Y page 152). Indicator lamp ; on button : and the ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go out. The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG menu in the multifunction display goes out. X To switch on (AMG vehicles): press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive program S, S+ or M is active, the automatic transmission switches to drive program C. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 145) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. In addition, the Stop/ Start active message is shown in the AMG menu in the multifunction display. If conditions for automatic engine switchoff have not been fulfilled, the (Y page 145) ¤ symbol will be shown in yellow. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. In addition, the Stop/Start inactive message is shown in the AMG menu in the multifunction display. i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. i Every time you switch on the engine using the key or the Start/Stop button, the ECO start/stop function is activated. Automatic engine switch-off Method of operation If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in the multifunction display, if: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green. Rthe vehicle is stationary. Rthe outside temperature is within the comfort range. Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature. Z 145 Driving and parking Driving 146 Driving Driving and parking Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system detects that the windscreen is not misted up when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe bonnet is closed. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened. If conditions for automatic engine switch-off have not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol will be shown in yellow. AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multifunction display additionally shows the Stop/ Start inactive message. i If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available again once the ¤ symbol reappears in green in the multifunction display. i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): automatic engine switch-off can take place a maximum of four times consecutively (initial stop and three subsequent stops). The ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display after the engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. The automatic engine switch-off is available once again when the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. i AMG vehicles: times which the engine can be automatically switched off. i You can also activate the HOLD function when the vehicle is stationary if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Depress the accelerator pedal gently, as the engine must be started first. i During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require full climate control capacity, the ECO start/stop function can be deactivated by pressing the ECO button (Y page 145). Automatic engine start The engine is started automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button. Ryou release the brakes when in transmission position D or N, when the HOLD function is not active. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou engage reverse gear R. Ryou move the transmission out of position P. Ryou switch to drive program S, S+ or M (AMG vehicles). Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door. Rthe vehicle starts to roll. Rthe brake system requires this. Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range. Rthe system detects moisture on the windscreen when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe battery's charge status is too low. i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. Driving 147 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 179) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 177). X Try to start the engine again. The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the key in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 142). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery. RThere If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not The fuel tank is empty. start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle. can be heard. The reserve fuel warning lamp is lit and the fuel gauge display shows 0. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 319). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z Driving and parking Problems with the engine Driving and parking 148 Automatic transmission Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Vehicles with a petrol engine: The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The coolant temperaThe coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently. more than 120 †. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant coolant warning lamp to cool down. may also be lit and a X Check the coolant level (Y page 299). Observe the warning warning tone may notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. sound. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Automatic transmission Important safety notes Selector lever Overview of transmission positions G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive Automatic transmission Transmission position and drive program display multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program C. Do not restrict the shift range. transmission position display (Y page 149) in the multifunction display. Transmission position and drive program display ! If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E or S. Do not restrict the shift range. : Transmission position display ; Drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions : Transmission position display ; Drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. i The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever. Engaging park position P ! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. P R N D Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the Z Driving and parking ! If the transmission position display in the 149 Automatic transmission 150 i The automatic transmission shifts automatically into park position P if you: Driving and parking Ropen the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary and the transmission is in position D or R Ropen the driver's door when driving at very low speed with the transmission in position D or R braked to a standstill in transmission position D. For further information on the ECO start/stop function, see (Y page 144). Engaging drive position D X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. i Depress the brake and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to disengage the parking lock. The transmission is in neutral N. If you want to shift from park position P directly to R or D: Transmission positions B Engaging reverse gear R Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Do not shift the transmission into position P(Y page 159) unless the vehicle is stationary. The automatic transmission shifts to P automatically if you: ! Only shift the automatic transmission to Rremove Rdepress the brake and the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down past the first point of resistance. Rpush the key off the engine when in R or D and open one of the front doors R when the vehicle is stationary. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. Neutral N with ECO start/stop function activated The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle is braked to a standstill in neutral N. For further information on the ECO start/stop function, see (Y page 144). Shifting to neutral (N) X Rswitch Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. Drive position D with ECO start/stop function activated The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle is C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. Automatic transmission Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. If you switch off the engine using the key or the Start/Stop button, the automatic transmission shifts to neutral N automatically. ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to damage to the transmission. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. AMG vehicles When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected. Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. X Program selector button Changing gear General notes The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. Gearshifting is determined by: Ra shift range restriction, if selected selected drive program(Y page 151) Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Rthe Driving tips Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts throttle: late upshifts Rmore Example: program selector button X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift program appears in the multifunction display. The program selector button allows you to choose between different driving characteristics. Z Driving and parking A 151 Automatic transmission Driving and parking 152 E Economy Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program C each time the engine is started. i RS cannot be selected during normal driving. For further information on RACE START, see (Y page 180). i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 152). i The automatic transmission switches to Steering wheel gearshift paddles automatic drive program E each time the engine is started. AMG vehicles : Left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle ; Right-hand steering wheel gearshift pad- dle Drive program selector with manual drive program X Turn drive program selector : until the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display in the speedometer. The drive program indicator on drive program selector : lights up in red. C Controlled Efficiency Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting RS RACE START Optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 152). You can restrict or derestrict the shift range by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. You can change gear yourself by using the steering wheel gearshift paddle in the manual drive program. i You can only change gear with the steer- ing wheel gearshift paddles when the transmission is in position D. Automatic drive program Drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) is characterised by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic transmission settings Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully Automatic transmission stability on slippery road surfaces, for example Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin Drive program S (or, in the case of AMG vehicles, drive programs S and S+) is characterised by the following: Rsporty engine and automatic transmission settings Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Ras a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption possibly being higher. Shift range: = To use the engine's braking effect 5 To use the braking effect of the engine on downhill gradients and for driving: Ron steep mountain roads mountainous terrain Rin arduous conditions Rin 4 To use the braking effect of the engine on extremely steep downhill gradients and on long downhill stretches Restricting the shift range X Shift ranges Introduction i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. i On AMG vehicles and vehicles with steering wheel gearshift paddles, you can restrict or derestrict the shift range using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. When the automatic transmission is in position D, it is possible to restrict or derestrict the shift range (Y page 153). The shift range selected is shown in the multifunction display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear. Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The automatic transmission shifts down one gear and restricts the shift range to the relevant gear. i If the maximum engine speed for the shift range is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission shifts up, even if the shift range is restricted. This prevents the engine from overrevving. Extending the shift range X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The shift range is derestricted. Z Driving and parking Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving 153 Automatic transmission 154 Clearing the shift range restriction Driving and parking X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until the number for the gear disappears from the multifunction display. or X Shift the transmission to position D. The automatic transmission shifts from the current shift range directly to D. Selecting the ideal shift range X the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. You must make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle and hold it in position. The automatic transmission shifts to the gear which allows optimum acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic transmission shifts down one or more gears. X AMG vehicles X If the colour in the multifunction display in the speedometer changes to red and the UP display message is shown, shift up a gear. Downshifting X Manual drive program Activating the manual drive program X X Press the program selector button (Y page 151) repeatedly until M appears in the multifunction display. AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector (Y page 152) until M appears in the multifunction display. The indicator M on the drive program selector lights up in red. AMG vehicles and vehicles with a DIRECT SELECT lever: you can select manual drive program M using the program selector or the drive program selector button. In manual drive program M, you can change gear using the steering wheel gearshift paddles if the transmission is in position D. Upshifting ! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- matic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down. i For maximum acceleration, pull the left- hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until the transmission selects the optimum gear for the current speed. Kickdown You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. X i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M. Automatic transmission 155 Switching off the manual drive program All vehicles (except AMG vehicles) with a DIRECT SELECT lever: press the program selector button (Y page 151) repeatedly until E or S appears in the multifunction display. X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector (Y page 152) until C, S or S+ appears in the multifunction display. Driving and parking X Z 156 Refuelling Problems with the transmission Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Refuelling Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Avoid contact with fuels. It is hazardous to your health if your skin comes into direct contact with fuels or you breathe in fuel vapours. G WARNING Do not use petrol to refuel a diesel tank. Never mix diesel with petrol. Doing so could damage the fuel system and the engine. The vehicle could also catch fire. ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. ! Do not switch on the ignition if you acci- dentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. Further information on fuel and on fuel grades can be found in the "Fuel" section (Y page 360). Refuelling Opening/closing the fuel filler flap insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap; X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. X Closing Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. X : To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tyre pressure table i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the central locking prevents the fuel filler flap from closing. ? Fuel type to be refuelled The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the key or using KEYLESS-GO. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Fuel filler flap emergency release X open the boot lid. Opening Switch off the engine. Remove the key from the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. This corresponds to key position 0: "key removed". The driver's door can be closed again. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. X Open the fuel filler flap fully. X Turn the fuel filler flap anti-clockwise and remove it. X X Slide the luggage net down. Open the right-hand side trim panel. X Remove the first-aid kit (Y page 310). X Detach the emergency release from retainer :. X Pull the emergency release in the direction of arrow ;. The fuel filler flap is released. X Open the fuel filler flap. X X Z Driving and parking Refuelling 157 158 Refuelling Problems with the fuel and fuel tank Driving and parking Problem Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The engine does not start. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of explosion or fire The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately and remove it (Y page 141). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry. X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel. X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 141). X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly. or X Start the engine using the touch-start function. To do this, turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock and then release it immediately (Y page 141). If the engine does not start: X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds (Y page 141). X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly. or X Start the engine again via the touch-start function. If the engine does not start after three attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. or The key battery is discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 78). X Open the boot lid or the tailgate. X open the boot lid. X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release (Y page 157). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking G WARNING Important safety notes If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: G WARNING If flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs are exposed to prolonged contact to parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they could ignite. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Rreleasing the parking brake the automatic transmission out of the parking position P Rstarting the engine. They could also operate the vehicle's equipment. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshifting ! A moving vehicle can lead to damage to the vehicle or damage to the drive train. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe parking brake must be applied. transmission must be in position P and the key must be removed from the ignition lock. Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front wheels must be turned towards the kerb. Rthe Z 159 Driving and parking Parking Parking 160 Switching off the engine Vehicles with automatic transmission Firmly depress the parking brake. X All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): shift the transmission to position P. Driving and parking X one of the front doors, the automatic transmission shifts to P. i The engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for about three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Parking brake G WARNING Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button X AMG vehicles: press P button :. Using the key Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. i If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. If you then open one of the front doors or remove the key from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P. If you shift the automatic transmission to N before switching off the engine, the automatic transmission remains in N even if a door is opened. Using KEYLESS-GO X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 141). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. i When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0, i.e. key removed. X i If you use the Start/Stop button to switch off the engine, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. If you then open If you must brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels could lock. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again. G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rreleasing the parking brake the automatic transmission out of the parking position P Rstarting the engine. They could also operate the vehicle's equipment. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshifting Driving tips 161 Driving and parking boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. ECO display When you apply the parking brake to brake the vehicle, the brake lamps do not light up. X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if the engine is running. X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Pull release handle :. The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. X Driving tips General notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake ECO display (example) The ECO display gives you information on how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the optimum driving style in terms of consumption, taking the actual and selected conditions into consideration. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption. The ECO display consists of three bars: RAcceleration RConstant RCoasting The percent value is the average value of the three bars. The three bars and the average value commence with a value of 50%. A higher percentage indicates a more economical driving style. The ECO display provides no information on the actual fuel consumption. A fixed percentage value of the ECO display does not correspond to a fixed consumption figure in l/100km. Apart from driving style, consumption is dependent on many factors such as: Rload Rtyre pressure start Rselected route Rnumber of consumers that are switched on Rcold Z Driving and parking 162 Driving tips These variable are not included in the ECO display. Your driving style is evaluated on the basis of the following three categories: Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes) The bar fills up: The bar depletes: Moderate acceleration, espeically at higher speeds Sporty acceleration Constant (evaluation of the driving style at any point in time) The bar fills up: The bar depletes: Constant speed and Fluctuations in avoidance of unnec- speed essary acceleration and deceleration processes Coasting (evaluation of total deceleration) The bar fills up: The bar depletes: Drive with care, Frequent braking keep your distance from the vehicle ahead and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal in good time: the vehicle can coast without braking i An economical driving style depends in particular on driving at moderate speeds. Achieving a higher value in the categories "Acceleration" and "Constant": Robserve the gearshift recommendations. Rdrive in drive program E. i On long journeys at constant speed, such as on the motorway, only the "Constant" category bar changes. i The ECO display sums up the driving behaviour from the start to the end of the journey. As a result, the bars change dynamically at the start of the journey. During long journeys there are fewer changes. For more dynamic changes, perform a manual reset. For further information on ECO display, see (Y page 213). Engine oil ! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter: if the vehicle is mostly driven for short distances, it is possible that malfunctions may occur during the automatic cleaning of the diesel particle filter. This may lead to fuel collecting in the engine oil and cause engine failure. Therefore, if you frequently drive short distances, you should take a 20 minute trip on a motorway or rural road at least every 500km. Brakes Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. Driving tips cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to prevent the vehicle from gaining speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Heavy and light loads G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking distance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet road surfaces If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying atten- tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance. RBrake occasionally to remove any possible salt residue. Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when doing so. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead. New brake pads/linings New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. AMG high-performance and ceramic brakes The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This is dependent on: Rspeed Rbraking force Renvironmental conditions, such as temper- ature and humidity Z Driving and parking i This also applies if you have activated 163 Driving and parking 164 Driving tips The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage lifetime that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain further information about this from your MercedesBenz Service Centre. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Do not forget this, and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during this run-in period. Excessively heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the brake system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. For high-performance driving in particular, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly. Driving on wet roads Aquaplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou are driving at low speeds. tyres have adequate tread depth. For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts and brake carefully. Rthe Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise dam- age the engine, the electronics or the transmission. If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rthe maximum permissible still water depth is 25 cm. Ryou should drive no faster than at walking pace. Winter driving Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 330). Driving with summer tyres Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 330). Driving systems G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X X Move the transmission to position N. Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. i For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 331). Driving systems Cruise control Important safety notes G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G WARNING Do not use cruise control Rin traffic conditions that do not allow you to drive at a constant speed (e.g. heavy traffic or winding roads). You may otherwise cause an accident. Ron slippery roads. The drive wheels may lose their grip when braking or accelerating and the vehicle may skid. Rwhen there is low visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow. General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 30 km/h. Cruise control lever G WARNING Cruise control cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when cruise control is activated. Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. : To activate or increase speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To activate at the current speed/last stored speed ? To activate or reduce speed Z Driving and parking Slippery road surfaces 165 Driving systems 166 A To switch between cruise control and var- iable SPEEDTRONIC Driving and parking B To deactivate cruise control You can operate cruise control and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. Storing and maintaining the current speed RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. In the multifunction display, the segments between the stored speed and the maximum speed light up. Activation conditions To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe parking brake must be released. must be driving faster than 30 km/h. RESP® must be switched on, but not intervening. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe cruise control function must be selected (Y page 166). Ryou Selecting cruise control You can accept the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h. X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Storing the current speed and calling up the last stored speed G WARNING X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. Only call up a stored speed if you know what that speed is and if it is suitable for the current traffic and driving situation. You can otherwise endanger yourself or others by unintentionally triggering sudden acceleration or braking. Driving systems 167 i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Deactivating cruise control Setting a speed There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Brake or Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: press the cruise control lever X X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou depress the parking brake. are driving at less than 30 km/h. RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®. Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving. If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Ryou Z Driving and parking briefly up : or down ; beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 10 km/h increments. 168 Driving systems control off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored is cleared when you Driving and parking switch off the engine. SPEEDTRONIC i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the limit speed stored. Variable SPEEDTRONIC General notes Important safety notes G WARNING Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G WARNING : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To store the current speed and call up the last stored speed ? To store the current speed or a lower speed SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. A To switch between cruise control or DIS- SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: With the cruise control lever, you can operate cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up areas Rpermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted (Y page 170) TRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC G WARNING If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the limit speed stored. Only use variable SPEEDTRONIC if you will not have to accelerate suddenly to a speed above Driving systems Rusing the cruise control lever Rby depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown) It is not possible to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC by braking. The segments in the multifunction display light up from the start of the scale up to the stored speed. You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. Storing the current speed and calling up the last stored speed G WARNING Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the current driving and traffic situation. Otherwise, sudden braking could endanger you or others. X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is on. If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. Storing the current speed X Setting a speed X X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. The current speed is stored and shown in the multifunction display. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for Z Driving and parking that stored as the limit speed. You could otherwise cause an accident. You can only exceed the limit speed stored if you deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: 169 Driving systems 170 a higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. or Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. Driving and parking X Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC G WARNING It is not possible to deactivate variable Speedtronic by braking. There are several ways to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated automatically if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), but only if your current speed does not differ by more than 20 km/h from the stored speed. You will hear a warning tone if this is the case. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between 160 km/h(e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and the maximum speed (Y page 224). Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active, even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). DISTRONIC PLUS Important safety notes G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid designed to assist driving. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. DISTRONIC PLUS does not react in particular to: Rpedestrians Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles and crossing traffic DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. Therefore, always pay attention to traffic conditions even when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Roncoming G WARNING General notes DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. If DISTRONIC does not recognise or no longer recognises the vehicle in front, do not activate DISTRONIC or, if it is already active, deactivate it. This is especially the case: DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. On long and steep downhill gradients, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle in front. The radar sensor system is switched off automatically in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 368). If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 225) and operational. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control in the speed range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle is driving in front of you, DISTRONIC operates in the speed range between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS on roads with steep gradients. Rbefore corners filter lanes Rwhen changing to a lane with faster moving traffic Rin complex driving situations or where lanes are diverted, e.g. at roadworks on a motorway DISTRONIC PLUS otherwise maintains the current speed set by you or accelerates up to the set speed. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of weather conditions. Deactivate, or do not activate, DISTRONIC PLUS: Ron Rif the roads are slippery, snow-covered or icy. The wheels could lose their grip when braking or accelerating. The vehicle could start to skid. Rif the sensors are dirty or there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain or fog. Distance control may be impaired. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle up to a maximum of 4 m/s2 depending on its speed. This corresponds to approximately 40% of your vehicle's maximum braking power. You must also apply the brakes yourself if this braking power is not sufficient. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a risk of collision with a vehicle in front, an intermittent warning tone sounds. In addition, the · distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Brake to avoid a collision. Z 171 Driving and parking Driving systems 172 Driving systems Cruise control lever Activation conditions To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Driving and parking Rthe engine must be running. It may take up : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To set the specified minimum distance = LIM indicator lamp ? To store the current speed and call up the last stored speed A To store the current speed or a lower speed B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS to two minutes of driving before DISTRONIC PLUS is ready for use. Rthe parking brake must be released. RESP® must be switched on, but not intervening. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe bonnet must be closed. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and the rear doors must be closed. Rthe vehicle must not be skidding. Activating while driving With the cruise control lever, you can operate DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS Important safety notes G WARNING The vehicle can be braked when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ;, or press it up : or down =. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down = until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. X When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected and is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in front is no longer detected and displayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and you will hear a tone. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS suspended message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. Activating when driving towards a stationary vehicle X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ;, or press it up : or down =. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly up : or down = until the desired speed is set. If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehicle is stationary as well. i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at under 30 km/h if a vehicle in front has been detected. Therefore, the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the instrument cluster should be activated (Y page 219). i You can use the cruise control lever to set the stored speed and the control on the cruise control lever to set the specified minimum distance (Y page 176). Pulling away and driving G WARNING If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. DISTRONIC PLUS then no longer brakes your vehicle. In such cases, control the distance from vehicles travelling in front with the brake alone. You could otherwise cause an accident and thereby injure yourself and others. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the speed being driven and for braking in good time. X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ;, or press it up : or down =. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is driving faster, it accelerates your vehicle, but only up to the speed you have stored. Changing lanes G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assist are only an aid designed to assist driving. They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If you change to the overtaking lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you if: Ryou are driving faster than 60 km/h. PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front. Ryou switch on the respective turn signals. RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision. If these conditions are met, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the disRDISTRONIC Z 173 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 174 Driving systems tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to the set speed you specified. i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS Stopping monitors the left lane for left-hand-drive vehicles and the right lane for right-handdrive vehicles. Vehicles with COMAND Online i The following function is not operational in all countries. DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information from your navigation system so that it can react appropriately to certain traffic situations. This is the case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you: Rapproach or drive around a roundabout Rapproach a T-junction Rturn off at a motorway exit Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily maintains the current driving speed and does not accelerate. This is based on the current map data in the navigation system. Example: roundabout The current speed is maintained: Rapproximately ten seconds before the roundabout/T-junction and for approximately 1.5seconds when driving on the roundabout Rapproximately twelve seconds before reaching a motorway exit and approximately four seconds after the motorway exit G WARNING Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be operated, activated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking. The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is cancelled and the vehicle can start moving if: RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the cruise control lever. Ryou accelerate. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. i Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. Driving systems driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe bonnet is opened. Ra system fault occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Rthe Setting a speed Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 10 km/h increments. Storing the current speed or calling up the stored speed G WARNING Only call up a stored speed if you know what that speed is and if it is suitable for the current traffic and driving situation. You can otherwise endanger yourself or others by unintentionally triggering sudden acceleration or braking. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X Z Driving and parking When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: 175 176 Driving systems Driving and parking Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 176). X To increase: turn control = in direction ;. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control = in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient and safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the speedometer When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed = light up. Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the multifunction display General notes In the Assistance menu (Y page 219) of the on-board computer, you can select the distance display. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated : Symbol for activated PRE-SAFE® Brake ; Vehicle in front, if detected Driving systems the vehicle in front ? Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable A Own vehicle X Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer (Y page 219). Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. or X : DISTRONIC PLUS activated ; Own vehicle = Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable ? Vehicle in front, if detected You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. X Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer (Y page 219). i You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the parking brake. are driving slower than 25 km/h and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detected. RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®. Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position. Rthe vehicle is near a radio telescope facility (Y page 368). Ryou switch off the radar sensor system (Y page 225). Ryou Z Driving and parking = Distance indicator: current distance to 177 178 Driving systems Driving and parking Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away, and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is open. Rthe vehicle has skidded. If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐ TRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles travelling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Other vehicles changing lane Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS General notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle cutting in. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend Narrow vehicles The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Vehicles travelling on a different line Obstructions and stationary vehicles The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD function is deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary. engine is running or it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened. Rthe parking brake is released. Rthe bonnet is closed. Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Crossing vehicles Activating the HOLD function G WARNING The vehicle's brakes are applied when the HOLD function is activated. For this reason, deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until ë appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic Z 179 Driving and parking Driving systems 180 Driving systems Deactivating the HOLD function Driving and parking G WARNING Never get out of the vehicle when the HOLD function is activated. The HOLD function must never be operated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. The HOLD function does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking. The braking effect of the HOLD function is cancelled and the vehicle could roll away if: Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. If you leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away. Ra system fault occurs. power supply is not sufficient. Rthe RACE START Important safety notes G WARNING RACE START is only available when SPORT handling mode is activated. SPORT handling mode will only be able to stabilise the vehicle to a limited degree if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. The vehicle is therefore harder to control at the threshold range. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. RACE START should only be used on closed off circuits. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. i RACE START is only available in AMG vehicles. RACE START enables optimum acceleration from a standing start. The precondition for this is a suitable high-grip road surface. The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Activation conditions Ryou You can activate RACE START if: accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Ryou shift the transmission to position P. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until ë disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe bonnet is opened. Rthe doors are closed. Rthe engine is running and it has reached an operating temperature of approximately 80 †. This is the case when the engine oil temperature in the multifunction display stops flashing. RSPORT handling mode is activated (Y page 66). Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot). Rthe transmission is in position D. Activating RACE START Depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed. X Turn the drive program selector clockwise (Y page 151) until the RS lamp lights up. The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in the multifunction display. i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. X X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 152). Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT handling mode remains activated. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. i After using it several times in short succession, RACE START will be unavailable until a certain distance has been driven. AIRMATIC or Vehicle level To confirm: pull the right steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 152). The RACE START available Depress accelerator message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal fully within two seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. Important safety notes Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The engine speed rises to approximately 3500 rpm. The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not release the brake pedal within five seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. ! The vehicle is lowered by about 15 mm if: X X X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START active message appears in the multifunction display. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. G WARNING If you have selected "Comfort tuning", the vehicle will be lowered if you lock it within 60 seconds of the engine being switched off. Make sure, therefore, that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel housing or under the vehicle when you lock the vehicle. Otherwise, limbs could become trapped. Ryou have selected "Comfort tuning" switch off the engine and Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately 60 seconds When parking, position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the kerb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Ryou Your vehicle regulates its height automatically. All-round level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. Z 181 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 182 The following vehicle levels are possible: If indicator lamp ; is not lit: Rnormal X Driving and parking Rraised: the vehicle is raised by about 25 mm when compared with the normal level. Rlowered: the vehicle is lowered by about 10 mm when compared with the normal level. The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can be set manually. The "Lowered" vehicle level is set automatically: Rat speeds above 140 km/h you have selected "Comfort tuning" (Y page 182) and then lock the vehicle within 60 seconds of the engine being switched off Rif you have selected "Sports tuning" (Y page 182) Rif Setting the vehicle level G WARNING Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel housing or under the vehicle while lowering the vehicle when it is stationary. Otherwise, limbs could become trapped. Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. Setting raised level X Start the engine. Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle height is adjusted to raised level. The Vehicle rising message appears in the display. The "Raised level" setting is cancelled if you: Rdrive at a speed over approximately 120 km/h Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed over 80 km/h. The "Raised Level" remains saved when you are not driving within these speed ranges. Setting the normal level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level. Suspension tuning General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or comfort Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. Rthe Driving systems Vehicle level The vehicle automatically sets the vehicle level at the rear axle. Rear axle level control ensures the best possible suspension and that the ground clearance remains constant even when the vehicle is loaded. This improves driving safety and fuel consumption. Suspension tuning The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected "Sports tuning". The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Comfort tuning In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Select comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of motorway. X Press button :. Indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected "Comfort tuning". The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension General notes i AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension is available for the CLS 63 AMG model. General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport + or Comfort If you select Sport or Sport + mode and restart the engine, the suspension setting reverts to Comfort mode. Rthe Sport mode : Mode selector button ; Button for storing, calling up and display- ing the selected mode = Sport + mode indicator lamp ? Sport mode indicator lamp The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Z Driving and parking Sports tuning 183 Driving systems Driving and parking 184 Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press button : once. Indicator lamp ? lights up. You have selected Sport mode. The AMG Ride Control SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Sport + mode The very firm setting of the suspension tuning in Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode only when driving on race circuits. If indicator lamps = and ? are off: X Press button : twice. Indicator lamps = and ? light up. You have selected Sport + mode. The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display. If indicator lamp ? lights up: X Press button : once. Second indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected Sport + mode. The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display. Comfort mode In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Select comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of motorway. X Press button : repeatedly until indicator lamps = and ? go out. You have selected Comfort mode. The AMG Ride Control COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. Storing and calling up settings Once the suspension tuning and drive program have been selected, you can store and call up your settings using AMG button ;. X To store: press AMG button ; until you hear a tone. X To call up: press AMG button ;. The stored suspension tuning and drive program are selected. X To display: briefly press AMG button ;. Your selection appears in the multifunction display. 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) G WARNING 4MATIC cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. Raccelerate less when driving. Radapt your driving style to suit road and traffic conditions. ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary. 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes G WARNING PARKTRONIC is only an aid and may not detect all obstacles. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically if you: : Example: sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 304). Rswitch on the ignition the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. Rshift Range of the sensors Example: side view General notes ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and objects which absorb ultrasonic sources. Z 185 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 186 Driving systems Example: top view Front sensors Centre Approx. 100 cm Corners Approx. 60 cm Rear sensors Centre Approx. 120 cm Corners Approx. 80 cm Minimum distance Centre Approx. 20 cm Corners Approx. 15 cm Transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Warning displays The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the roof lining in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. : Indicator lamp ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Park Assist is then also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Driving systems 187 Problems with PARKTRONIC Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 304). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approxThe problem may be caused by an external source of radio or imately 20seconds. ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Active Parking Assist Important safety notes G WARNING Active Parking Assist is merely an aid and may sometimes recommend parking spaces that are not suitable for parking. For example, these might be spaces where parking is prohibited, driveways, unsuitable surfaces, etc. Active Parking Assist measures the parking space as you drive past it. Any later changes to the parking space are not taken into account. For instance, this may be the case when the vehicle parked in front of or behind the space changes its position or when an obstacle is moved into the parking space. Active Parking Assist does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. If you rely solely on Active Parking Assist, you could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. G WARNING Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e. g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space too early. This may lead to a collision. For this reason, you should avoid using Active Parking Assist in such situations. Z Driving and parking Problem 188 Driving systems Driving and parking G WARNING The front of the vehicle will veer out in the direction of the oncoming traffic during the parking operation. In some cases the vehicle will also take you onto sections of the oncoming lane during the parking procedure. You are responsible for safety at all times and must pay attention to any road users approaching or passing. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A suitable parking space is indicated by the parking symbol. Active steering intervention can assist you during parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 185). When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement Parking tips: Rthat Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possible past the parking space. Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown or partially occupied by trailer drawbars might be identified incorrectly or not at all. Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 186) warning messages during the parking procedure. Rat any time, you can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it. Active Parking Assist will then be cancelled. Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Rwhen snow chains or an emergency spare wheel are fitted, you should not use Active Parking Assist here either. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. Ryou can also engage forward gear prematurely. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should a gear be changed too early to achieve a sensible parking position, the parking procedure will be cancelled. Driving systems Detecting parking spaces 189 Parking Example: detected parking space : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist is switched on automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see the parking symbol as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the frontpassenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. To park on the driver's side, you must leave the driver's side turn signal switched on. This must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel are at least 1.5 m wide Rthat are at least 1.3 m longer than your vehicle A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 15 m away from it. Rthat PARKTRONIC and Active Parking Assist are merely parking aids and may not detect all obstacles. They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could, otherwise, endanger yourself and others. G WARNING When parking, you need to make sure that no obstacles are located in the vicinity of the vehicle during the entire operation. Active Parking Assist does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. It merely aids you by intervening actively in the steering. To stop the vehicle or avoid an accident you need to apply the brakes yourself. Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X X X Release the multifunction steering wheel. Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When reversing, drive at a speed below 10 km/h. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled. Z Driving and parking G WARNING Driving systems 190 i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve X Driving and parking the best parking results by backing up as far as possible. When doing so, also observe the PARKTRONIC messages. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. The Park Assist active Select D Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X The Park Assist active Select R Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Further transmission shifts may be necessary. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist switched off message appears in the multifunction display. PARKTRONIC continues to be available. X Manoeuvre if necessary. X Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 186). Cancelling Active Parking Assist You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any time. Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be cancelled at once. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. or X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the centre console (Y page 186). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately cancelled. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is cancelled automatically if: Rthe transmission is shifted too early. using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible. Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h. Ra wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails. The ä warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Park Assist cancelled message. When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, you must steer again yourself. Rparking Reversing camera Important safety notes G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. Driving systems General notes Rat 191 night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Reversing camera : is an optical parking aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle in the COMAND display. Reversing camera : is located in the handle strip of the tailgate. View through the camera G WARNING The reversing camera is only an aid and may display obstacles in a distorted or incorrect manner, or may not even display them at all. The reversing camera does not relieve you of the responsibility to pay attention. The camera cannot show objects: Rvery near to the rear bumper Rbelow the rear bumper Rthat are located above the tailgate handle recess You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and next to the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. G WARNING Under the following circumstances, the reversing camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif Rin the tailgate is open heavy rain, snow or fog the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situation. You could otherwise injure others or damage objects and your vehicle while you are parking. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. Activating the reversing camera Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the "Reversing camera" function is selected in COMAND APS (see the separate operating instructions for COMAND APS). X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the COMAND display. X Guide lines in the COMAND display G WARNING Using the reversing camera can be dangerous if you are colour blind or your ability to distinguish colours is impaired. Only use the reversing camera if you can see and distinguish between all the coloured guide lines that are displayed by the reversing camera in the COMAND display. Z Driving and parking Rif 192 Driving systems G WARNING Driving and parking Please note that objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are. These include: Rthe bumper of a vehicle that is parked behind your vehicle Ra trailer drawbar Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe tail-end of a lorry Rslanted posts The lines are only guides, not accurate measurements of the distance to an obstacle. Therefore, you should never pass the red line when approaching an obstacle. You could otherwise cause an accident and injure yourself and others. ATTENTION ASSIST Important safety notes G WARNING ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and may detect your tiredness or lapses in concentration too late or not at all. It is not a substitute for a well rested and attentive driver. Fatigue may cause you to recognise hazardous situations too late, misjudge a situation or react slower. For this reason, make sure you feel rested before you begin driving and during your journey. Always take breaks in good time and regularly, especially during long journeys. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. General notes Information in the COMAND display (example) Guide lines ; and = show the approximate distance to the rear area. Yellow guide line ; approximately 1.0 m and red guide line = approximately 0.25 m. The distances only apply to objects that are at ground level. Blue guide lines : depict the width required for the vehicle. They are used to align the vehicle with the edge of the carriageway, e.g. the kerb. ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active in the 80 km/h to 180 km/h range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics Rjourney-related parameters, e.g. time of day, length of journey The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Driving systems you are predominantly driving slower than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/h Rif you are currently using COMAND APS or making a telephone call with COMAND APS Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed Warning and display messages in the multifunction display If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You then hear an intermittent warning tone twice and the Atten‐ tion Assist: Drowsiness detected message appears in the multifunction display. X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 220). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. X If necessary, take a break. X Press the a button to confirm the message. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts assessing your tiredness again when you continue your journey if: Ryou switch off the engine. take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break. Ryou Speed Limit Assist Important safety notes G WARNING Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and may detect speed limit signs incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from oncoming traffic. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rthe traffic signs are covered, for instance by dirt, snow or trees. Rthe traffic signs are poorly illuminated. Rthere are ambiguous traffic signs, for instance near roadworks or on multi-lane roads. Traffic signs always have priority over the Speed Limit Assist display. Speed Limit Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. : Speed Limit Assist camera Speed Limit Assist shows you detected speed limits in the multifunction display. Data from Z Driving and parking Rif 193 Driving systems Driving and parking 194 the navigation system is also used for this purpose. If a traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit is detected, it is shown in the multifunction display. If Speed Limit Assist does not detect any traffic signs, the speed limit from the digital road map is taken and shown in the display. Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signs with a camera attached behind the top of the windscreen. Information in the multifunction display Permanently showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction display X Display Speed Limit Assist using the onboard computer (Y page 218). A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit : appears in the multifunction display as soon as it is detected. Traffic sign indicating a speed limit : is generally displayed until: Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the speed limit is detected. Ryou make a turn. Ryou leave or enter a town. Rthe road type changes (e.g. motorway, country road). Ryou have travelled a certain minimum distance without the traffic sign being repeated or detected again. i You can also activate Speed Limit Assist : Traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit (example) using COMAND APS. The maximum permissible speed is then shown in the COMAND display; see the COMAND APS operating instructions. ; Speed Limit Assist is available and the warning function is switched on in the onboard computer = Units used in the traffic sign displayed Briefly showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction display X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning function using the on-board computer (Y page 218). Symbol ; appears. A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit : appears in the multifunction display for around five seconds as soon as it is detected. Any other information in the multifunction display is hidden for this period. Night View Assist Plus Important safety notes G WARNING Night View Assist Plus is only an aid designed to assist driving and does not relieve you of the responsibility to pay attention. Continue to look through the windscreen instead of relying on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are responsible for safety and must drive in accordance with traffic conditions. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. The system may be impaired or may not function if: main-beam headlamps due to oncoming traffic. Rthere i Infrared light is not visible to the human is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Ron bends, on uphill gradients or downhill gradients. G WARNING Night View Assist Plus does not detect objects in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Look through the windscreen when manoeuvring. Make sure that there are no people or animals in the area in which you are manoeuvring. eye and therefore does not dazzle. Night View Assist Plus can therefore remain switched on even if there is oncoming traffic. Activating Night View Assist Plus Activation conditions You can only activate Night View Assist Plus if: Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. is dark. Rthe light switch is in the Ã or L position. Rreverse gear has not been engaged. Rit Activating Night View Assist Plus In addition to the illumination provided by the normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus uses infrared light to illuminate the road. Night View Assist Plus camera : picks up the infrared light and displays a monochrome image in COMAND. The image displayed in COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by main-beam headlamps. This enables you to see the road's course and any obstacles in good time. When pedestrian recognition is active, pedestrians recognised by the system are highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus display. Light from the headlamps of oncoming vehicles does not affect the Night View Assist Plus display in the multifunction display. This is also the case if you cannot switch on the Make sure that COMAND APS is switched on. X Press button :. The Night View Assist Plus display appears in the COMAND display. X You can read about how to adjust the brightness of the COMAND display in the COMAND APS operating instructions. i The infrared headlamps only switch on when the vehicle is being driven at speeds of at least 10 km/h. This means that you do not have the full visual range while stationary and cannot check whether Night View Assist Plus is working. Z 195 Driving and parking Driving systems 196 Driving systems Pedestrian recognition Driving and parking G WARNING Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or inoperative if: Rpedestrians are partially or entirely obscured by objects, e.g. by parked vehicles. Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night View Assist Plus display is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflections. Rpedestrians do not contrast with the surroundings. Rpedestrians are not in an upright position, e.g. sitting, squatting or lying. : Night View Assist Plus display ; Pedestrian recognised = Framing ? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition i Animals are not recognised by pedestrian recognition. Night View Assist Plus can recognise pedestrians using typical characteristics, e.g. when there is a silhouette in the shape of a person. Pedestrian recognition is then switched on automatically if: RNight View Assist Plus is activated. Ryou are driving faster than about 10 km/h. surroundings are dark, e.g. when driving outside built-up areas without street lighting. Rthe If pedestrian recognition is active, symbol ? appears. If a pedestrian is now recognised, they are framed = and thereby highlighted. If the pedestrian recognition system has brought a pedestrian to your attention, look through the windscreen to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and pedestrians cannot be gauged accurately by looking at a screen. It may be the case that objects are highlighted as well as pedestrians. Misted up or dirty windscreen If the windscreen in front of the camera is misted up or dirty on the inside or outside, the Night View Assist Plus display is affected. X To demist: check the automatic air conditioning settings (Y page 130) and fold down the camera cover (Y page 305). X To demist the inside of the windscreen: fold down the camera cover (Y page 305) and clean the windscreen (Y page 304). Driving systems 197 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The picture quality of Night View Assist Plus has deteriorated. The windscreen wipers are smearing the windscreen. X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 121). The windscreen is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a car wash. X Clean the windscreen (Y page 304). There is windscreen chip damage in the camera's field of vision. X Replace the windscreen. The windscreen is misted up on the inside. X Demist the windscreen (Y page 130). The windscreen is iced up. X De-ice the windscreen (Y page 130). There is dirt on the inside of the windscreen. X Clean the inside of the windscreen (Y page 304). Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 197) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 199). Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes G WARNING Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It may fail to detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or only detect them too late. Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors, strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow, rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehicles are detected late or not at all. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. General notes Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you from speeds of 30 km/h. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible collision warning. For monitoring, Active Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper. For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 225) and operational. The radar sensor system is automatically deactivated near radio telescope facilities (Y page 368). Z Driving and parking Problems with Night View Assist Plus 198 Driving systems Monitoring range of the sensors Driving and parking G WARNING Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. There is no display and no warning. If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation in different lanes. This may be the case if vehicles are driving at the edge of their lane that is furthest away from your vehicle. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time. The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display G WARNING Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below 30 km/h. The indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the edge of their lane nearest your vehicle. : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp If Blind Spot Assist is switched on, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. Driving systems Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Switching on Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 225) and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 220) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane are present. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, e.g. near roadworks. Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. Rthe road is narrow and winding. Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Lane Keeping Assist Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all. Z Driving and parking If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning always occurs when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. 199 Driving systems 200 Driving and parking General notes shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Standard If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera : at the top of the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you have selected km as the display unit in the Display unit Speed-/odome‐ ter(Y page 221) function in the on-board computer, Lane Keeping Assist assists you at speeds above 60 km/h. If miles is selected as the display unit, the assistance range starts at 40 mph. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Activating Lane Keeping Assist Adaptive If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway. Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive(Y page 220). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, symbol : is Rthe Ryou road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. Active Driving Assistance package General notes The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 170), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 201) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 204). Active Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and may detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthe rear and/or front sensors are dirty. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or only detect them too late. It cannot detect vehicles which are overtaken at a small distance and then enter the blind spot area. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. ing. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. To support the course-correcting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sensor system. The free space in the direction of travel is then evaluated. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 30 km/h. The radar sensor system is switched off automatically in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 368). For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 225) and operational. Monitoring range G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. No visual nor audible warnings are emitted and the system does not brake the vehicle to correct your course. If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation. This may be the case if vehicles are driving at the edge of their lane that is furthest away from your vehicle. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. General notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the area to the sides of your vehicle which are behind the driver. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warnZ 201 Driving and parking Driving systems 202 Driving systems Indicator and warning display G WARNING Driving and parking Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below 30 km/h. The indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time and cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of your lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time. The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator grille. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grille are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly. : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp If Active Blind Spot Assist is switched on, indicator lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning always occurs when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is then no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Driving systems Driving and parking Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Course-correcting brake application G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Automatic braking by the system may not always be sufficient to avoid a collision. In such cases, you need to steer, brake or accelerate yourself. In very rare cases, the system may detect a risk of collision where there is none and brake in error near crash barriers or similar road boundaries. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect all traffic situations and road users. Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lateral distance between you and other road users or obstacles. You can, for example, countersteer gently or depress the accelerator pedal at any time to cancel inappropriate braking action. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, correct steering and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. 203 If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, the message shown in the illustration appears in the multifunction display. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. Either no braking application, or a coursecorrecting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, on both sides of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches too closely on the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. Ryou brake or accelerate decisively. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. Z 204 Driving systems RESP® is deactivated. Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is Driving and parking detected. Activating Active Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 225) and Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 220) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Active Lane Keeping Assist Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. branch off, cross, or merge. Rthe road is narrow and winding. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. General notes Important safety notes G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to inadequate illumination of the road surface, snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Rthe windscreen is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane are present. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and as a result the lane markings cannot be recognised. Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, e.g. near roadworks. Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera : at the top of the windscreen. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. If you have selected km as the display unit in the Display unit Speed-/odome‐ ter(Y page 221) function in the on-board computer, Active Lane Keeping Assist assists you at speeds above 60 km/h. If miles is selected as the display unit, the assistance range starts at 40 mph. Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway. Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Ryou Rthe Ryou road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. Lane-correcting brake application G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Corrective braking may not always be sufficient to return your vehicle to its original lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect the current traffic situation or other road users. Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lateral distance between you and other road users or obstacles. In rare cases, broken lines or certain structures on the road surface may be detected by the system as solid lane markings. You can, for example, countersteer gently at any time to cancel inappropriate braking action, e.g. if you intentionally drive across a solid lane marking. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take weather conditions into account. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, correct steering and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the The message shown in the illustration appears in the multifunction display when a lane-correcting brake application occurs. If you leave your lane under certain circumstances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is designed to help you bring the vehicle back into the original lane. This function is available in the range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. A lane-correcting brake application can only be made after driving over a solid, recognisable lane marking. Before this, a warning must be emitted by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognised. The brake application also slightly reduces driving speed. i A further lane-correcting brake applica- tion can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. Z 205 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 206 Driving and parking RESP® is deactivated. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect road and traffic conditions. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if: Ryou steer slightly in the opposite direction. use a turn signal. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ryou Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognised. Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive(Y page 220). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, symbol : is shown in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Useful information ............................ Important safety notes .................... Displays and operation .................... Menus and submenus ...................... Display messages ............................. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 208 208 209 212 231 258 On-board computer and displays 207 On-board computer and displays 208 Important safety notes Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 23). Important safety notes G WARNING Only use the on-board computer when road and traffic conditions permit. You would otherwise be distracted and unable to concentrate properly on driving, and could cause an accident. G WARNING No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative. As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such as speed, outside temperature, warning and indicator lamps, display messages or system failures. Driving characteristics may be impaired. Adjust your driving style and vehicle speed accordingly. Contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. G WARNING The on-board computer only records and displays malfunctions and warnings from certain systems. For this reason, you should always make sure that your vehicle is safe to use. You could otherwise cause an accident by driving an unsafe vehicle. G WARNING The operating safety of your vehicle could be impaired if maintenance work is carried out incorrectly. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Moreover, the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. For an illustration of the instrument cluster, see (Y page 30). Displays and operation On-board computer and displays Displays and operation 209 Instrument cluster Instrument cluster: kilometres : Speedometer with segments (Y page 210) ; Multifunction display (Y page 211) = Rev counter (Y page 210) ? Coolant temperature (Y page 210) A Fuel gauge Instrument cluster: miles : Speedometer with segments (Y page 210) ; Multifunction display (Y page 211) = Rev counter (Y page 210) Z On-board computer and displays 210 Displays and operation ? Coolant temperature (Y page 210) A Fuel gauge Coolant temperature gauge The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side (Y page 30). Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. At high outside temperatures and when driving uphill, the coolant temperature may rise to the end of the scale. Rev counter The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated (Y page 168): The segments light up from the start of the scale to the selected limit speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 170): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Operating the on-board computer Overview Outside temperature display G WARNING At temperatures just above freezing point, the street may be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. If you do not adapt your driving style to the conditions, the vehicle could skid. For this reason, adapt your driving style and speed to the weather conditions. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 211). Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. : Multifunction display ; Right control panel = To switch on LINGUATRONIC; see the sep- Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RCruise control activated (Y page 165): arate operating instructions ? Back button A Left control panel X To activate the on-board computer: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Left control panel = ; RCalls 9 : Press briefly: 9 : a up the menu and menu bar RScrolls through lists RSelects a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number Right control panel ~ 6 RMakes or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches W X RAdjusts 8 RMute the volume Back button % Press briefly: RBack RSwitches off LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions RHides display messages/calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the telephone book/redial memory RIn RConfirms selection/display mes- or ends a call telephone book/redial memory RExits Press and hold: the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open RRejects % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Multifunction display sage the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialling the selected number RIn the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station RIn : Description field ; Menu bar = Drive program (Y page 149) Z 211 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 212 ? Transmission position (Y page 149) A Permanent display: outside temperature or speed (Y page 221) X To show the menu bar ;: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds. Text field : shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages. The following messages can appear in the multifunction display: XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 187) ¯ Cruise control (Y page 165) È SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 168) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 117) À ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 192) ¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 144) Ä Speed Limit Assist (Y page 193) Ã Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 199) Ã Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 204) ë HOLD function (Y page 179) Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 68) 120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed exceeded (only for certain countries) Menus and submenus Menu overview Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 210). Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: RTrip menu (Y page 212) menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 214) RAudio menu (Y page 215) RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 217) RAssist. menu (assistance) (Y page 218) RServ. menu (Y page 220) RSettings menu (Y page 221) RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 228) The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly in vehicles with an audio system and in vehicles with COMAND Online. The examples given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND Online. RNavi Trip menu Standard display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip meter : and total distance recorder ; is shown. Trip computer "From start" or "From reset" Example: "From start" trip computer : Distance ; Time = Average speed Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ECO DISPLAY. X When the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, the ECO display is automatically reset. For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 161). Displaying the range and current fuel consumption ? Average fuel consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select From start or From reset. X The values in the From start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, whilst the values in the From reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 214). The From start trip computer is automatically reset if: Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded. The From reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the current fuel consumption (not for AMG vehicles) and the approximate range. X The approximate range which can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current driving style. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the range. Digital speedometer ECO display : Digital speedometer Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer. X Example: ECO display Z 213 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 214 Resetting values Route guidance not active Example: resetting the trip computer "From start" : Direction of travel Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press the a button. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. ; Current street X Activated route guidance No change of direction announced You can reset the values of the following functions: Rtrip meter computer "From start" Rtrip computer "From reset" RECO display Rtrip : Distance to the destination ; Distance to the next change of direction i If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From start" trip computer will also be reset. If you reset the values in the "From start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display will also be reset. = Current street ? Symbol indicating "follow the road's course" Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation Navigation menu Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. For more information on the navigation system, see the separate operating instructions. Becker® Switch on the audio system with MAP PILOT or COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. X : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction has been announced, you will see visual distance display ; next to the symbol for change of direction =. This shortens from the bottom to the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation Audio menu Selecting a radio station : Waveband : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual = ? A B distance display Lane recommendation Lane continues through change of direction New lane during a change of direction Change-of-direction symbol On multilane roads, the system can display lane recommendation = for the next change of direction. During the change of direction, additional lanes may be displayed. Lane recommendations are only displayed if the relevant data is available on the digital map. Other status indicators of the navigation system RO: you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. RNew route... or Calculating route: calculating a new route ROff map or Off road: the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (offmap position). RNo route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination. ; Station frequency with memory position i Station ; is displayed with the station frequency or station name. The memory position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online and select Radio; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a stored station: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. If no station list is received: X To select a station using the station search: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. X i For information on switching wavebands and storing stations, see the separate operating instructions. i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcasting): see the separate operating instructions. Z 215 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 216 Audio player or audio media operation TV operation Example: CD/DVD changer display : Current track : Channel frequency with memory position Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online and activate audio CD/DVD mode or MP3 mode; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired track : has been reached. If you press and hold the 9 or : button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio devices or media support this function. X i The memory position is only displayed along with station : if this has been stored. Switch on COMAND Online and select TV; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a stored station: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. X i Storing a TV channel: see the separate operating instructions. i Depending on the digital TV broadcaster, radio stations can also be received. The multifunction display shows TV (RADIO). Video DVD operation If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). Example: CD/DVD changer display : Current scene Switch on COMAND Online and select video DVD; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene : has been reached. X Telephone menu or COMAND Online, the mobile phone searches for a network. RTelephone ready or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RTelephone No service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. i You can obtain further information about suitable mobile phones and connecting mobile phones via Bluetooth®: Introduction G WARNING Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding the use of mobile phones in the vehicle. If it is permitted to use mobile phones while the vehicle is in motion, you should only use them when the road and traffic conditions allow. Otherwise, you may be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Switch on the mobile phone (see the separate operating instructions). X Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket (Y page 286). or X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the audio system or COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. Rfrom any Mercedes Benz Service Centre the Internet at: http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Ron Accepting a call X You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RPlease enter PIN: the mobile phone has been placed in the mobile phone bracket and the PIN has not been entered. When you enter your PIN via the mobile phone, LINGUATRONIC, the audio system Example: incoming call X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call even if you are not in the Tel menu. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel. You can end or reject a call even if you are not in the Tel menu. Dialling a number from the phone book Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book. X Z 217 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 218 X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. or To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one second. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X To exit the telephone book: press the ~ or % button. Assistance menu Introduction X Redialling The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialled in the redial memory. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or % button. X In the Assist. menu, you have the following options: Rshow Speed Limit Assist and activate/ deactivate its message function (Y page 218) Rshow the distance display (Y page 219) Ractivate/deactivate ESP®(Y page 219) Ractivate/deactivate the PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 219) Ractivate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 220) Ractivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 220) Ractivate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 220) Speed Limit Assist Displaying Speed Limit Assist X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Speed Lim. Asst.. X Press the a button. Under certain conditions, detected speed limits are shown in the multifunction display (Y page 193). Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit Assist message function X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Speed Lim. Asst.. Press the a button. The multifunction display shows Speed Limit Assist. X Press the : button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate or deactivate: press a. If the Speed Limit Assist message function is activated, a detected speed limit is automatically displayed for five seconds. Other items in the multifunction display are not shown during this time. X If Speed Limit Assist is operational and the message function is activated, the multifunction display shows the Ä symbol when the ignition is switched on. Showing the distance display Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Distance display. X Press the a button. The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display appears in the multifunction display (Y page 176). X If the Sensors deactivated message appears, the radar sensor system is deactivated. X Check whether or not the radar sensor system is permitted to be activated (Y page 368). X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 225). Deactivating/activating ESP® G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMG vehicles (Y page 66). For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 65). X Start the engine. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ESP. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 263). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 232). Rin Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select PRE-SAFE Brake. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. X Z 219 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 220 When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, the multifunction display shows the Ä symbol as long as the HOLD function is not activated (Y page 179). Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: if PARKTRONIC is activated and you are driving at a speed under 35 km/h, the j Active Parking Assist symbol is shown instead of the Ä symbol (Y page 187). If the PRE-SAFE Brake: Sensors deacti‐ vated message appears, the radar sensor system is deactivated. X Check whether or not the radar sensor system may be activated (Y page 368). X Activate the radar sensor system (Y page 225). For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake, see (Y page 68). Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Attention Assist. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. X When ATTENTION ASSIST is activated, the À symbol appears in the multifunction display when the ignition is on. For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 192). Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Asst.. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. X If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors deac‐ tivated or Active blind spot assist. sensor system deactivated message appears, the radar sensor system is deactivated. X Check whether or not the radar sensor system may be activated (Y page 368). X Activate the radar sensor system (Y page 225). For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 197). For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 201). Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Lane Keep. Asst. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X Press a to confirm. X When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the Ã symbol appears in the multifunction display when the ignition is on. For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 204). Service menu In the Serv. menu, you have the following options: Rcall up display messages in the message memory (Y page 231) Rrestart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 333) Rcheck the tyre pressure electronically (Y page 334) Rcall up when a service is due (Y page 300) Settings menu Introduction You can determine whether the multifunction display shows some messages in miles or kilometres. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display unit Speed-/odometer: function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. X Press the a button to save the setting. X The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu distance recorder and the trip meter Rtrip computer Rcurrent consumption and the range Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control RSPEEDTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display Rtotal In the Settings menu, you have the following options: Rchange the instrument cluster settings (Y page 221) Rchange the light settings (Y page 222) Rchange the vehicle settings (Y page 224) Rchange the auxiliary heating settings (Y page 225) Rchange the convenience settings (Y page 226) Rrestore the factory settings (Y page 227) Instrument cluster Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The Display unit Speed-/odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometres or miles in the multifunction display. Selecting the permanent display function You can determine whether the multifunction display permanently shows your speed or the outside temperature. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Permanent display: function. You will see the selected setting: outside temperature or Dig. speedo [mph]. X Press the a button to save the setting. X i Speed is displayed in mph. Z 221 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 222 Menus and submenus i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is unavailable. Lights Setting the brightness for the instrument cluster lighting and switches The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the Brightness Display/switches: function. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Brightness Display/Switches: function. You will see the selected setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to any level from Level 1 to Level 5 (bright). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. If the light switch is set to Ã, T or L, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light. i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated. Switching the daytime driving lights on/ off The Day lights function can only be switched on with the engine turned off. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. Press the : or 9 button to select the Day lights: function. If the Day lights: function has been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Further information on daytime driving lights (Y page 111). Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Intell. Light System function. If the Intell. Light System function has been switched on, the cone of light and the L symbol in the multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. When you activate Intell. Light System, you activate the following functions: Rmotorway mode Ractive light function Rcornering light function Rextended range foglamps If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, the multifunction display shows the Intell. Light System: system inoperative Inactive for left-side traffic or Intell. Light System: System inoperative Inactive for right-side traffic (Y page 223) display message instead of the Intell. Light System function in the Light submenu. Further information on the Intelligent Light System (Y page 115). Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Dipped beams Setting for: function. You will see the selected setting: Rightside traffic or Left-side traffic. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you change the setting, conversion does not take place until the next time the vehicle is stationary. This function is only available on vehicles with the Intelligent Light System. You can use this function to switch between symmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam (Y page 110). If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, then motorway mode and the extended range foglamps are unavailable. A qualified specialist workshop can set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right or left . Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/ off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Adapt. main beam function. If the Adapt. main beam function has been switched on, the cone of light and the _ symbol in the upper multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Amb. light +/- function. You will see the selected setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to any level from Off to Level 5 (bright). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. Setting the ambient lighting colour X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Ambient light colour function. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set the colour to SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR. X Press the a or % button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. For further information about Adaptive Highbeam Assist, see (Y page 117). Z 223 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 224 Press the : or 9 button to select the Surround lighting function. When the Surround lighting function is activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily: Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated. X Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is reactivated the next time you start the engine. If you have activated the Surround light‐ ing function and the light switch is set to Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark: Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking with the key. If you start the engine, the surround lighting is switched off and automatic headlamp mode is activated (Y page 111). RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the exterior lighting remains lit for 60seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the boot lid, the exterior lighting goes off after 5 seconds. i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when the surround lighting and delayed switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up: Rside lamps Rdipped-beam headlamps Rdaytime driving lights Rsurround lighting in the exterior mirrors Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off If you activate the Lighting delayed sw.off function, the interior lighting remains on for 20seconds after you remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light. delay function. When the Lighting delayed sw.-off function is activated, the vehicle interior is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Vehicle Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Limit speed (winter tyres): function. You will see the current setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments of ten (230 km/h to 160 km/h). The Off setting switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC off. X Press the a button to store the entry. For further information on permanent SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 170). Switching the automatic locking feature on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. door locks function. When the Automatic door locks function is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you activate the Automatic door locks function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 15 km/h. For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (Y page 84). Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking confirmation If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up red. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the radar sensor system X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. Press the 9 or : button to select Radar sensor (See Owner's Man.):. You will see the selected setting: on or off. X Press the a button to save the setting. X i You must deactivate the radar sensor system in certain countries and near radio telescope facilities. For further information, see (Y page 368). When you are close to radio telescope facilities, the radar sensor system will be deactivated automatically. The following systems are switched off when the radar sensor system is deactivated: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 170) PLUS (Y page 64) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 68) RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 197) RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 201) RBAS Heating Auxiliary heating departure time G WARNING Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxiliary heating is in operation. Inhaling these exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in confined spaces without an extraction system, e.g. a garage. G WARNING When operating the auxiliary heating parts of the vehicle can get very hot. Make sure that the exhaust system does not under any circumstances come into contact with easily ignitable material such as dry grass or fuels. The material could otherwise ignite and set the vehicle alight. Choose your parking spot accordingly. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus prohibited at filling stations or when your vehicle is being refuelled. You must therefore switch off the auxiliary heating at filling stations. Z 225 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 226 Menus and submenus ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. This function is only available on vehicles with auxiliary heating (Y page 132). In the Heating submenu, you can select a stored departure time or change a departure time. The auxiliary heating timer function calculates the switch-on time according to the outside temperature so that the vehicle is preheated by the departure time. When the departure time is reached, the auxiliary heating continues to heat for a further five minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary heating adopts the THERMATIC or THERMOTRONIC temperature setting. You can switch off the auxiliary heating by using the remote control or the auxiliary heating button on the centre console. i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes. Selecting the departure time or deactivating a selected departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press a to confirm. You will see the selected setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select one of the three departure times or Timer off (no timer active). X Press a to confirm. If a departure time is selected, the yellow indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary heating button. Changing the departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press a to confirm. You will see the selected setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select A, B or Change C. X Press a to confirm. You can now change the departure time. X Press the = or ; button to select the display to be changed: hours, minutes. X Press the : or 9 button to set the selected display. X Press the a button to store the entry. The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary heating button lights up. Convenience Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature G WARNING The steering wheel moves when the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature is active. There is a risk of occupants becoming trapped. Before activating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature and become trapped. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Easy Entry/Exit: function. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 104). Switching the belt adjustment on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Belt adjustment function. When the Belt adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 50). Switching the fold-in mirrors when locking function on/off This function is only available on vehicles with Memory Function (Y page 107). When you activate the Auto. fold in function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. When you unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. fold in function. If the Auto. fold in function is activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. : To fold the exterior mirrors in or out If you have switched the Auto. fold in function on and you fold the exterior mirrors in using button :, they will not fold out automatically (Y page 105). You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors using button :. Resetting to factory settings Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory setting submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset all settings? message appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. X For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: the Limit speed (winter tyres) function in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set in the Vehicle submenu. If you want to reset the Daytime driving lights in the Light submenu, you must turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. Z 227 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 228 AMG menu in AMG vehicles AMG displays SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the suspension tuning. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed. or X Briefly press the AMG button on the centre console (Y page 183). X : Digital speedometer ; Gear indicator = Upshift indicator RACETIMER ? Engine oil temperature Displaying and starting the RACETIMER A Coolant temperature B ECO start/stop function status indicator (Y page 144) X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. Upshift indicator UP= indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual gearshift program. Upshift indicator UP= fades out other messages until you have shifted up. If the engine oil temperature is below 80 †, the oil temperature is shown in blue. Avoid using the full output of the engine during this time. SETUP : Lap ; RACETIMER You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER. X Displaying the intermediate time : Drive program (C/SS+/M) ; ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling mode (SPORT) = Suspension tuning (COMFORT/SPORT/ SPORT+) Press the = or ; button to select Interm. Time. X Press a to confirm. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X Deleting all laps Starting a new lap : RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap X Press a to confirm New Lap. i It is possible to store a maximum of six- teen laps. Lap 16 can only be stopped with Finish Lap. If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. Stopping the RACETIMER Overall evaluation Press the % button on the steering wheel. X Press a to confirm Yes. : RACETIMER overall evaluation The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position 2 or 3 and then press a to confirm Start, timing is continued. ? Distance covered X Resetting the current lap X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button to select Reset Lap. X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". ; Total time driven = Average speed A Maximum speed This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown. X Z 229 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 230 Lap evaluation : Lap ; Lap time = Average lap speed ? Lap length A Top speed during lap This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. X Display messages Introduction General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 179) page 159) RParking (Y Hiding display messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X Z 231 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 232 Display messages Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes: currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Rself-diagnosis Rthe is not yet complete. on-board voltage may be insufficient. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X !÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function may not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 233 On-board computer and displays Display messages 234 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T! ÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRESAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. inoperative See Owner's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. J Release parking brake J Check brake fluid level You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also sounds. X Release the parking brake. There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING The braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error. # Check brake pad wear The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. PRE-SAFE Functions cur‐ rently limited See Owner's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rthe Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers (Y page 304). X Restart the engine. X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 66). X PRE-SAFE Functions cur‐ rently limited See Owner's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a fault. BAS PLUS or the distance warning signal may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ü If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has been inserted into a rear seat belt buckle. For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts: (Y page 51). Z 235 On-board computer and displays Display messages 236 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ý If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has not been inserted in a rear seat belt buckle. G WARNING A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended level of protection. This poses an increased risk of injury. X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts (Y page 49). For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts, (Y page 51). 6 Restraint syst. malfunction Con‐ sult workshop There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System, see (Y page 41). 6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Front left malfunc‐ G WARNING tion Consult work‐ shoporFront right The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintenmalfunction Con‐ tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. sult workshop This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 6 Rear left malfunc‐ tion Consult work‐ shop or Rear right malfunction Con‐ sult workshop Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand windowbag. Left windowbag mal‐ The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. function Consult workshop or Right G WARNING windowbag malfunc‐ The left or right windowbag may either be triggered unintentionally tion Consult work‐ or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. shop This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Lights i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Left cornering (Y page 120). light or Right cor‐ or nering light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Left dipped beam or Right dipped beam The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 120). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 237 On-board computer and displays Display messages 238 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 120). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Rear left indica‐ tor or Rear right indicator b Front left indica‐ tor or Front right indicator The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 120). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. Left mirror indica‐ X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself tor or Right mir‐ (Y page 120). ror indicator or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Third brake lamp b Left-hand tail lamp/brake lamporRight-hand tail lamp/brake lamp b Left main beamorRight main beam The third brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 120). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 120). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand high beam is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 120). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The rear foglamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 120). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Rear fog lamp b Front left parking lamp or Front right parking lamp b Left revers. lamp or Right revers. lamp b Left daytime driv‐ ing lamp or Right daytime driving lamp b Intell. Light Sys‐ tem inoperative b Malfunction See Owner's Manual b AUTO lights inoper‐ ative b Switch off lights The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 120). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 120). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left-hand or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 120). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available without the Intelligent Light System. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The exterior lighting is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The light sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Z 239 On-board computer and displays Display messages 240 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Main-beam Assist inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Main-beam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windscreen. Rvisibility If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Top up coolant See Owner's Manual ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 299). X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X ? The fan motor is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Stop vehi‐ cle Switch engine off G WARNING Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. This poses a risk of injury. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is under 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The reading may rise up to 120 † under normal driving conditions if the coolant has been filled correctly. Z 241 On-board computer and displays Display messages 242 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Rfaulty alternator poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. Rtorn If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 4 Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (Y page 298). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 298). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. 4 AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest Add 1 litre engine (Y page 298). oil when next refu‐ X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 298). elling X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. 8 Reserve fuel level The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level drops into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be operated. X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail. ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Please replace air cleaner ! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. Clean the fuel fil‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ter Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. Attention Assist: Take a break! During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you get enough rest. À Attention Assist inoperative ¨ ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. Vehicle rising ¨ Vehicle rising Please wait The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not pull away. The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears. Z 243 On-board computer and displays Display messages 244 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¨ You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low. AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. STOP vehicle Vehi‐ cle too low AIRMATIC is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h. X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front wings or the tyres could be damaged if the steering movement is too large. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level. Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehicle. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ¨ Malfunction Speed Limit Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windscreen. Rvisibility If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Speed Limit Assist is operational again. Speed Limit Assist is only available in certain countries. Speed Limit Assist: Unavaila‐ X Drive on. ble in this country Speed Limit Assist is available again as soon as you drive in a country in which its use is approved. Speed Limit Assist inoperative Speed Limit Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 179). off Radar sensor deac‐ tivated See Own‐ er's Manual The radar sensor system is deactivated. X Check whether or not the radar sensor system may be activated (Y page 368). X Activate the radar sensor system (Y page 225). Radar sensor deac‐ tivated autom. See Owner's Manual Vehicles with a navigation system: the vehicle is close to a radio telescope facility and is therefore prohibited from transmitting any radar signals. The radar sensor system has switched off automatically (Y page 368). If DISTRONIC PLUS was activated, it is no longer available. A warning tone also sounds. If Active Blind Spot Assist was activated, it is no longer available. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake are then also unavailable. X Drive on. Once you have moved far enough away from the radio telescope, the above functions are available again. Vehicles with Becker® MAP PILOT: if the Becker® MAP PILOT is not connected, the radar sensor system is deactivated automatically. BAS PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS, Active Blind Spot Assist and PRE-SAFE® brake are unavailable. X Connect the Becker® MAP PILOT; see the separate operating instructions. Z 245 On-board computer and displays Display messages 246 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual or Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist cur‐ rently unavailable See Owner's Manual Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rvisibility Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Clean the windscreen. X Lane Keeping Assist inopera‐ tive or Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual or Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist cur‐ rently unavailable See Owner's Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle. X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe sensors are dirty. function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rthe Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Clean the sensors (Y page 304). X Restart the engine. X Blind Spot Assist inoperative or Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist cancel‐ The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. led X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the multifunction steering wheel. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 187). Z 247 On-board computer and displays Display messages 248 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Park Assist inoper‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking manoeuvres. ative Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 187). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. PARKTRONIC is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Guidance finished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 170). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS available again DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 170). DISTRONIC PLUS cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: rently unavailable Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. See Owner's Manual R the sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. DISTRONIC is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers (Y page 304). X Restart the engine. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS inactive You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS --- km/h An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 170). DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ erative SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Limit --- km/h While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated. Cruise control --- km/h A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 165). 120 km/h Maximum speed exceeded Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded. In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h!. X Drive more slowly. Z 249 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 250 Display messages Tyres Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre pressure Check tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X If there is a flat tyre, inspect the tyres (Y page 312). X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 333). Check tyre pres‐ sures then restart Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 333). Run Flat Indicator inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes The tyre pressure monitor is measuring the tyre pressure. X Drive on. The tyre pressures appear in the multifunction display after you have been driving for a few minutes. Tyre press. monitor The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre press. moni‐ tor inoperative No wheel sensors The wheels fitted do not have a suitable tyre pressure sensor. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Check tyres The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X If there is a flat tyre, inspect the tyres (Y page 312). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 334). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Z 251 On-board computer and displays Display messages 252 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Warning tyre defect The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards: RA flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. could lose control of the vehicle. RContinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X If there is a flat tyre, inspect the tyres (Y page 312). RYou Rectify tyre pressure The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 334). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 335). Wheel sensor(s) missing There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received currently unavail‐ from the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. able X Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. A warning tone also sounds. Tyre pressure Cau‐ tion Tyre malfunc‐ tion G WARNING If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards: RA flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. could lose control of the vehicle. RContinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X If there is a flat tyre, inspect the tyres (Y page 312). RYou h Tyre pressure Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. G WARNING With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X If there is a flat tyre, inspect the tyres (Y page 312). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 334). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. h Please correct tyre pressure The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 334). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Z 253 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 254 Display messages Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To start engine, shift to either P or N You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N. Auxiliary battery malfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. Risk of vehicle rolling Transmission not in P The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). Without changing gear, consult workshop You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The vehicle is moving. Only select position P when X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying vehicle is station‐ attention to road and traffic conditions. ary X Shift the transmission to position P. N The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions M The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Close the bonnet. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors. _ The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds. X Push the backrest back until it engages. Rear left seat backrest not locked or Rear right seat back‐ rest not locked _ Front left seat backrest not locked or Front right seat back‐ rest not locked & inoperative Bat‐ tery low & inoperative Refuel vehicle The driver's or front-passenger seat backrest is not engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Push the backrest back until it engages. The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switched itself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 132). X Drive for a longer distance. The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating is operational again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient. There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on (Y page 132). X Refuel at the nearest filling station. Z 255 On-board computer and displays Display messages 256 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages & inoperative See Owner's Manual Ð Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The auxiliary heating has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heating, waiting several minutes between each attempt (Y page 132). X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The power steering assistance is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. Power steering mal‐ G WARNING function See Own‐ er's Manual You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Telephone No service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. Top up washer fluid X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 299). Key Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Â You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. X Use the correct key. Key does not belong to vehicle Â Replace key The key needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Â The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 79). Change key batter‐ ies Â Key not detected (red display message) The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. Â Key not detected (white display message) The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: X Â Key still in vehi‐ cle Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking. X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle. Z 257 On-board computer and displays Display messages 258 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Â Remove starting button, then insert key The KEYLESS-GO key is not continually detected. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Â At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again. Close doors to lock vehicle Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning and indicator lamps overview L Dipped-beam headlamps (Y page 111) T Side lamps (Y page 112) K Main-beam headlamps (Y page 113) #! Turn signals (Y page 113) R Rear foglamp (Y page 112) ü Seat belts (Y page 259) J Brakes (Y page 260) ! ABS (Y page 261) ÷ ESP®(Y page 263) å ESP® OFF (Y page 263) M SPORT handling mode in AMG vehicles (Y page 264) 6 SRS (Y page 266) ; Engine diagnostics (Y page 266) 8 Reserve fuel (Y page 267) ? Coolant (Y page 267) · Distance warning signal (Y page 269) % h Diesel engine: preglow (Y page 143) Tyre pressure monitor (Y page 270) Safety Seat belts Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine starts. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49). ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened. Only for certain coun- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49). tries: the red seat belt The warning tone ceases. warning lamp lights up after the engine starts. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds. ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49). ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out. the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat. the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow door is closed. them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the The red seat belt warn- same time, the car is being driven faster than 25 km/h or has been ing lamp flashes and an briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49). warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Z 259 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 260 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Safety systems Problem J The yellow brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G WARNING The brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. J G WARNING The red brake system The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking charwarning lamp comes on acteristics may be affected. while the engine is runThere is a risk of an accident. ning. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. The red brake system G WARNING warning lamp comes on while the engine is run- The braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. ning. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault. For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and the adaptive brake lights are also deactivated, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. Z 261 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 262 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are also deactivated. Possible causes: RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete. on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Rthe G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are not available either. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. J÷å! The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP® are not available due to a fault. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are not available either. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 263 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 264 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. the vehicle is in motion. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 65). å ESP® is deactivated. ESP® The yellow OFF G WARNING warning lamp is lit while ® ® the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. Reactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 65). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. M AMG vehicles only: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SPORT handling mode is activated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions written in the "Activating/deactivating SPORT handling mode" section (Y page 66). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷å ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and the adaptive brake lights are not available due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ÷å ESP® The yellow and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 265 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 266 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J You are driving with the parking brake applied. The red brake system X Release the parking brake. warning lamp comes on The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds. 6 The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Drive on carefully. X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System, see (Y page 41). Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; There may be a fault, for example: The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system lights up while the Rin the exhaust system engine is running. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines) Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 158). X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level warning lamp lights up drops into the reserve range. while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ning. ? The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 267 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 268 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 299). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is under 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. This poses a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 299). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. X Driving systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed The red distance warn- selected. ing lamp lights up while X Increase the distance. the vehicle is in motion. · You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line The red distance warn- of travel at too high a speed. ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately. the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to A warning tone also brake or take evasive action. sounds. Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 170). Further information on PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 68). Z 269 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 270 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Tyres Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp is on. The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tyres. G WARNING With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X If there is a flat tyre, inspect the tyres (Y page 312). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 334). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. 271 Stowing and features Useful information ............................ 272 Stowage areas .................................. 272 Features ............................................. 279 272 Stowage areas Useful information Stowing and features i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 23). Stowage areas Loading guidelines G WARNING Secure and position the load as described in the loading guidelines. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by the load being thrown around in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. You will find further information in the "Securing a load" section. Even if you follow all the loading guidelines, the load will increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident. G WARNING Keep the boot lid closed while the vehicle is in operation. Otherwise, you could be poisoned by exhaust fumes entering the vehicle. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the boot as possible. Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. Ralways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place. Ralways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant lashing material. pad sharp edges for protection. i Load restraints are available at any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Stowage compartments Important safety notes G WARNING The stowage compartments must be closed when items are stored in them. Luggage nets are not designed to secure heavy items of luggage. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be placed in the luggage net. Do not place hard objects in the map pockets. Objects must not protrude from the map pockets. Glove compartment Spectacles compartment To open: pull handle : and open glove compartment flap ;. X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; upwards until it engages. There is a compartment to stow spectacles in the roof lining on the driver's side. X To open: pull down spectacles compartment : by the handle. X i The glove compartment can be ventilated (Y page 137). The glove compartment can only be locked and unlocked using the emergency key element. X To lock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2. X To unlock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90° anticlockwise to position 1. Stowage compartments in the front centre console Front stowage compartment (except AMG vehicles) To open: slide the cover forwards by handle : in the direction of the arrow until it engages. X To close: briefly press the front of handle :. X Z 273 Stowing and features Stowage areas Stowage areas 274 i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a Stowing and features 12 V socket, a USB port, and an AUX-IN jack or a Media Interface are installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the separate Audio or COMAND Online operating instructions). Rear stowage compartment (except AMG vehicles) X Briefly press trim ; in the direction of the arrow. Cover : swings upwards. Stowage compartment under the front seats G WARNING Only load the stowage compartment with the maximum permissible load of 1.5 kg. Otherwise, the transported load could, for example, be thrown out of the stowage compartment if you change direction suddenly or brake sharply, and you or others could be injured. AMG vehicles X Briefly press trim :. i The stowage tray can be removed. Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest X To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ; forwards. i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, the fire extinguisher is located in the stowage compartment under the driver's seat. X To open: pull handle : up. The armrest folds out. Stowage areas Stowage compartments in the rear centre console 275 Luggage nets are located in the frontpassenger footwell and on the left and righthand sides of the boot. Through-loading facility in the rear bench seat G WARNING X To open: slide covers : and ; in the direction of the arrow. i There is a 12 V power socket in the front stowage compartment. Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the vehicle or in the boot unless they are secured. Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. G WARNING Always drive with the boot lid closed. Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle interior. The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to increase the boot capacity. Folding the seat backrest forwards X X To open: fold down seat armrest ;. Fold cover : of the armrest upwards. Stowage nets G WARNING Only place lightweight items in the luggage net. Do not use it to transport heavy, bulky, sharp-edged or fragile objects. In the event of an accident, the luggage net will not secure the transported goods. i Vehicles with memory function: when you fold one or both parts of the rear seat backrest forwards, the respective front seat moves forward slightly, when necessary, in order to avoid contact. Z Stowing and features Important safety notes Stowage areas 276 Vehicles without memory function: if necessary, move the driver's or frontpassenger seat forwards. X Open the boot. X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest release handle :. The corresponding rear seat backrest is released. Stowing and features X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it engages. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X i You should always engage the rear seat Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Folding back the seat backrest G WARNING Make sure that the rear seat backrest is correctly engaged. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. backrests if you do not need the throughloading feature. This will prevent unauthorised access to the boot from the vehicle interior. Securing a load Lashing eyelets General notes G WARNING Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets evenly. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Please observe the loading guidelines. Rchange Observe the following notes on securing loads: Rsecure the load using the lashing eyelets. not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. Rdo Stowage areas edges or corners. Rpad sharp edges for protection. Boot : Lashing eyelets There are six lashing eyelets in the boot. EASY-PACK boot box Important safety notes G WARNING Only load the EASY-PACK convenience box to the maximum permissible load of 10 kg. To prevent overloading, the floor of the box moves down onto the boot floor mat when loaded with more than approx. 5 kg. Do not transport sharp-edged and fragile objects in the box. Otherwise, e.g. in the event of a rapid change of direction or heavy braking, the objects could be thrown out of the EASY-PACK convenience box and injure you and others. ! When the EASY-PACK convenience box is pulled out, no objects may be placed on the frame of the box or pushed onto the frame from above. Otherwise, the box could be damaged. Bag hook G WARNING Only hang light loads on the bag holders. Do not use them to transport heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects. When braking sharply, changing direction quickly or in the event of an accident, the bag hooks will not secure the items sufficiently. This could result in injury to yourself or others. Adjusting the height to any position G WARNING Make sure that your hands are not inside the EASY-PACK convenience box when the load surface moves up. Otherwise, you could be injured. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 3 kg. Do not use it to secure a load. Pull the box out by handle : in the direction of the arrow all the way to the stop. X Lowering the load surface: push the centre of load surface ; down by hand in the direction of the arrow until load surX X Pull bag hook ; down by tab :. Z Stowing and features Rdo not route lashing materials across sharp 277 Stowage areas 278 Stowing and features face ; has reached the desired position and the box is the desired size. X To raise the load surface: press switch =. Load surface ; of the box moves up automatically. X To stow the box: push the box in by handle : all the way to the stop. i Store the EASY-PACK boot box on a flat surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf. Stowage well under the boot floor ! Remove the handle again before closing the boot lid and snap it in tightly to prevent the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, you could damage the handle. Removing and fitting X To install: insert retainer ; of box : into slots = Raise box : and press hooks A into anchorage ? as far as they will go. X Turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B anti-clockwise by 90°. X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch B anti-clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B clockwise by 90°. X Move box : downwards and pull it out from anchorages ?. X The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment. X To open: pull handle : up. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. Roof carrier Important safety notes G WARNING An incorrectly secured roof carrier, ski rack or load could become detached from the vehicle. These objects might then be thrown Features ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can raise the sliding sunroof fully and open the boot lid fully when the roof carrier is fitted. ! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them. Attaching the roof carrier Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Features Cup holders Important safety notes G WARNING Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Only use the cup holders for containers of a suitable size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks. You may otherwise scald yourself. Cup holder in the front centre console All vehicles (except AMG) X X To open: press the front of cover ;. To remove the insert: slide catch : inwards on both sides in the direction of the arrow. Z Stowing and features around, and could injure you or others or cause an accident. Follow the roof carrier/ski rack manufacturer's installation instructions and special instructions for use. The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling. You must always observe the maximum roof load of 100 kg. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, traffic and weather conditions and drive with particular care if the roof is laden. 279 Features 280 Remove cup holder insert = upwards. X To refit the insert: place the insert in the stowage space. X Slide catch : outwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. Stowing and features X To open: slide cover : forwards. X To remove the insert: slide catch ; inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cup holder insert = upwards. X To refit the insert: place the insert in the stowage space. X Slide catch ; outwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. X You can remove the insert and the rubber mat of the cup holder to clean them. Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only. Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight AMG vehicles : Cup holders ; Cover X on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. To open: slide cover ; to its foremost position. You can remove the cup holder insert to clean it. Clean it with clean, lukewarm water only. AMG vehicles: you can remove the rubber mat of the cup holder in the direction of the arrow to clean it. Clean it with clean, lukewarm water only. Cup holder in the rear-compartment centre console Fold down the rear seat armrest. To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover. X Press release catch :. Cup holder ; folds out forwards. X Fold the cover of the rear seat armrest back down again if necessary. X To close: lift the cover of the rear seat armrest. Swing cup holder ; back until it engages. X X Features 281 Bottle holders G WARNING Do not transport heavy, sharp-edged and fragile bottles in the bottle holder. In the event of an accident, the bottle holder can not secure the bottles adequately. than 0.5 kg that are stored in the bottle holder rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle holder could otherwise be damaged. : Mirror light ; Bracket = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Press the outer edge of button : and slide in the direction of the arrow until the bottle fits into the opening. X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder. X Glare from the side The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a capacity from 0.7 l to 1.5 l. The bottle holder does not secure bottles; it merely prevents them from tipping over. Sun visors Overview G WARNING Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors covered while driving. You could otherwise be dazzled, which may impair your view of traffic conditions and as a result could cause an accident. Fold down sun visor :. Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;. X Swing sun visor : to the side. X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required. X X Z Stowing and features ! Make sure that any bottles weighing more Features 282 Rear-window roller sunblind Extending/retracting the roller sunblind ! Make sure that the roller sunblind can Stowing and features move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 141). X To extend or retract: briefly press button :. The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts. To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X To remove the insert: hold insert = by the indentation at the sides and lift it up ; and out. X To refit the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X To close: briefly press cover : at the front. The cover moves back. X X Ashtray Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. AMG vehicles To open: briefly press the trim on cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X To remove the insert: slide insert ; forwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove insert ;. X To refit the insert: place the insert into the holder and press it in the opposite direction of the arrow until it engages. X To close: fold down cover :. X i You can remove the ashtray insert and use the resulting compartment for stowage. All vehicles (except AMG) Features To open: slide cover ; forwards. To remove the insert: pull insert : up and out. X To fit the insert: fit insert : from above into the holder and press down into the holder until it engages. Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: briefly press cover : at the front. The cover moves back. X X X Cigarette lighter G WARNING Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob. Otherwise, you might burn yourself. Make sure that children travelling in the vehicle are not able to injure themselves on the hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it. AMG vehicles Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 141). X To open: briefly press the trim on cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X 12 V sockets General notes X All vehicles (except AMG) Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 141). X To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 141). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as lamps or chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. i An emergency cut-off ensures that the on- board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This Z Stowing and features Rear-compartment ashtray 283 Features 284 ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. Stowing and features Socket under the armrest AMG vehicles To open: briefly press the trim on cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: fold down cover :. X Open the stowage space under the armrest (Y page 274). X Lift up the cover of socket :. X Socket in the front centre console Socket in the rear-compartment centre console All vehicles (except AMG) To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: briefly press cover : at the front. The cover moves back. X X X Slide cover ; forwards. Lift up the cover of socket :. Mobile phone Important safety notes G WARNING Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding operating mobile communications equipment in a vehicle. Features If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you must only do so if the traffic situation permits. Otherwise, you could be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Two-way radios and fax equipment used without low-reflection exterior aerials can interfere with the vehicle's electronics and thereby jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle and your safety. Therefore, you must only use this equipment if it is correctly connected to a separate reflection-free exterior aerial. More information on suitable mobile phones, mobile phone brackets and on connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with Audio 20, Audio 50 or COMAND Online can be obtained: G WARNING If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile phone bracket, you can speak to the person you are calling using the hands-free system. X Open the telephone compartment (Y page 274). X If required by the design of the mobile phone bracket, install the sliding adapter (Y page 286). X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket (see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting). Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures: Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in the vehicle Rmutual influences between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones are minimised An exterior aerial has the following advantages: Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen- erated by a wireless device to the exterior. field strength in the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial. Rthe i There are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted in your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific. i You can connect a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone with Audio 20, Audio 50 or COMAND Online via the Bluetooth® interface. This also applies if your vehicle is equipped with convenience telephony. Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect Ron i The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. Using a mobile phone i On some mobile phone brackets, you first have to connect the mobile phone via Bluetooth® to the mobile phone bracket (see the separate operating instructions for the mobile phone bracket). If this is the case, the mobile phone does not have to be inserted into the bracket for you to be able to use the telephone functions. However, the charging function and aerial function are not available. Operating the mobile phone You can operate the telephone using the 6 and ~ buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. You can operate other mobile phone functions via the on-board computer (Y page 217). When you remove the key from the ignition lock, the mobile phone stays switched on. Z Stowing and features Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. 285 286 Features However, you can no longer use the handsfree system. If you have an active call and would like to take the key out of the ignition lock, first remove the mobile phone from the bracket. Certain mobile phone brackets require a sliding adapter so the bracket can be installed correctly. Fitting the sliding adapter Stowing and features i When using a bracket connected to the mobile phone via Bluetooth® and you wish to proceed with a call: Switch to private mode before removing the key from the ignition lock. Otherwise, it may take up to 20 seconds, before the mobile phone separates from the system. Only then can the telephone call continue. Information on the necessary steps for setting up "private mode" can be found in the separate mobile phone operating instructions. i Not all mobile phones support "private mode". Sliding adapter for the mobile phone bracket Overview Insert sliding adapter : by aligning the openings with lugs ; of contact plate =. X Attach the mobile phone bracket to sliding adapter :; see the separate mobile phone bracket fitting instructions. X Press both release buttons ? and press sliding adapter : with the mobile phone bracket down until it engages. X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket; see the separate mobile phone bracket installation instructions. X Removing the sliding adapter : Previous model: example of a mobile phone bracket ; New model: example of a mobile phone bracket = Sliding adapter i The sliding adapter for the mobile phone bracket is only available for automatic vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever. Remove the mobile phone from its bracket; see the separate mobile phone bracket fitting instructions. X Press both release buttons ; and press sliding adapter : with the mobile phone bracket upwards until it disengages. X Features 287 Remove the mobile phone bracket from sliding adapter :; see the separate mobile phone bracket fitting instructions. X Detach sliding adapter : using suitable tool = and remove. X Important safety notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. i The garage door opener is only available for certain countries. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. The HomeLink® garage door opener is compatible with most European garage and gate opener drives. More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is available from: Rat a qualified specialised workshop Rthe HomeLink® hotline (0) 08000 466 354 65 (free of charge) or +49 (0) 6838 907 277 (charges apply) Ron the Internet at: http://www.homelink.com Programming Programming buttons G WARNING Only press the button on the integrated garage door opener if there are no persons or objects present within the sweep of the garage door. Persons could otherwise be injured as the door moves. Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror Garage door remote control A is not part of the integrated garage door opener. X Before programming for the first time, clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener (Y page 289). X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as button ;, = or ? is programmed for the first time. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp : will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X Point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 5to 20 cm. i The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts may be required. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. X Z Stowing and features Garage door opener Features 288 Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. If indicator lamp : lights up green or flashes, then programming has been successful. X Release button B of garage door drive remote control A. X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. Stowing and features X i If the indicator lamp flashes green after successful programming, the garage door system is using a rolling code. After programming, you must synchronise the garage door opener integrated in the rearview mirror with the receiver of the garage door system. Synchronising the rolling code Your vehicle must be within range of the garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. Observe the safety notes when performing the rolling code synchronisation. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the programming button of the door or gate drive (see the door or gate drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming of additional remote controls"). i Usually, you now have 30seconds to initiate the next step. X Press previously programmed button ;, = or ? of the integrated garage door opener until the door closes. The rolling code synchronisation is then complete. Problems when programming If you have problems when programming the integrated garage door opener, please note the following: RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage door drive remote control A. This can usually be found on the back of the remote control. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from the button which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 5and 30 cm or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf there is another remote control for the same garage door drive, perform the programming steps again using this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been fitted in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls transmit only for a limited period (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the aerial cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Opening or closing the garage door Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) BG (Bulgaria) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 12 April 07 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 i The transmitter will transmit a signal for CH (Switzer- Article 6 of Directive land) 1999/5/EC R&TTE14357 27 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 X as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. CY (Cyprus) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 5 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 CZ (Czech Republic) General Licence GL-30/R/ 2000 Reg. No. 844 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433 DK (Denmark) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 20 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 DE (Germany) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE7519301 29 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 EE (Estonia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 ES (Spain) 000438/2005, 000439/2005, 000440/2005 000441/2005, 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Clearing the memory Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp lights up yellow. X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the indicator lamp turns green. X i Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. Frequencies Europe Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) AD (Andorra) 20 July MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 AT (Austria) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 BE (Belgium) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Z 289 Stowing and features Features Stowing and features 290 Features Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) FI (Finland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 IS (Iceland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 FR (France) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 IT (Italy) DGPGSR/II/347487/ FOR/15347 DGPGSR/II/347487/ FOR/15348 DGPGSR/II/347487/ FOR/15350 DGPGSR/II/347487/ FOR/15357 DGPGSR/II/347487/ FOR/15358 DGPGSR/II/347487/ FOR/15359 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 GI (Gibraltar) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE13 May 05 (UK) MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 GR (Greece) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11409/18/4/2005 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 HR (Croatia) SDR 224/06 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 HU (Hungary) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 IC (Canary Islands) 000438/2005, 000439/2005 000440/2005, 000441/2005 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005, 3rd June 2005 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 IE (Ireland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LI (Liechten- Article 6 of Directive stein) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LT (Lithuania) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LU (Luxembourg) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE150405/9538 24 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LV (Latvia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27.4-1B-1609 26 April 06 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Features Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) Country MC (Monaco) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 SI (Slovenia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 500-1/2005-437 9 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 MT (Malta) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 SK (Slovakia) NL (Netherlands) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE Slovak 206/11/2005 4 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 UK (United Kingdom) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 NO (Norway) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE05/02424-SA644 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 PL (Poland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 21 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 PT (Portugal) ANCOM-S08399/05 27, 40, 433, 868 RO (Romania) RU (Russian Federation) Article 6.4 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 POCC DE.MJ05.H00015 13 May 05 MHz: 433 SE (Sweden) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) Africa Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) EG (Egypt) W-KLE-17/08 Mar. 06 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 RE (Réunion) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 July 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 ZA (South Africa) 11 October 2005 MHz: 27, 40, 433 America Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) BB (Barbados) Registration not required MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 CL (Chile) 38447/F-23 No.3.3634 MHz: 40, 433 Z Stowing and features Country 291 292 Features Stowing and features Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) GF (French Guyana) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 GP (Guadeloupe) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 MQ (Martini- Article 6 of Directive que) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 July 05 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 MX (Mexico) MHz: 280 to 390 Asia Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) AE (United Arab Emirates) 1623/5/10-2/26/76 MHz: 433 JO (Jordan) TRC/LPD/2005/23 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 KW (Kuwait) 5 October 2005 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 LB (Lebanon) 2920/O&M/2006 / 3 July 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 SA (Saudi Arabia) 11_02_05/5024-5-6 MHz: 418, 433 SY (Syria) 279/4/14 / 05 March 06 TR (Turkey) National Certification 23 July 07 MHz: 433 Australia Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) AU (Australia) 28 June MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 NZ (New Zealand) 20 March 06 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433 Floormat on the driver's side G WARNING Make sure that there is sufficient clearance around the pedals when floormats are used, and that the floormats are properly secured. The floormats must be correctly secured at all times using the securing knob and retainers. Before you drive off, check the floormats and secure them if necessary. A floormat which is not properly secured can slip and thereby interfere with the movement of the pedals. Do not place floormats on top of one another. Slide the seat backwards. To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat from retainers ;. X Remove the floormats. X X Features 293 Retrofitted anti-glare film Stowing and features Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the windows can interfere with radio/mobile telephone reception. This is particularly the case for conductive or metallic-coated films. You can obtain information about anti-glare film from a qualified specialist workshop. Z 294 295 296 296 300 301 Maintenance and care Useful information ............................ Engine compartment ........................ Service ............................................... Care .................................................... 296 Engine compartment Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Maintenance and care els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 23). Engine compartment Bonnet Opening the bonnet G WARNING Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. If you do so, the bonnet may open up and block your view. G WARNING There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open, even if the engine is not running. Some engine components can become very hot. To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those components described in the Owner's Manual and observe the relevant safety notes. G WARNING The radiator fan between the radiator and the engine can start automatically, even if the key has been removed from the ignition lock. For this reason, you must not reach into the fan rotation area. You could otherwise be injured. Vehicles with a petrol engine: The electronic ignition system uses high voltage. For this reason, you must never touch ignition system components (ignition coil, ignition cables, spark plug connectors or test socket) while: Rthe engine is running engine is being started Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine is being cranked by hand You could otherwise suffer an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured. Vehicles with a diesel engine: The electronic injection control uses high voltage. For this reason, you must never touch injection system components while: Rthe Rthe engine is running engine is being started Rthe ignition is switched on You could otherwise suffer an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured. Rthe G WARNING The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage could be set in motion. When the bonnet is open, you or others could be injured by the wiper linkage. Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. Remove the key or make sure that no ignition position has been selected with KEYLESS-GO. All indicator lamps must be off in the instrument panel. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. Engine compartment 297 Radiator Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. The bonnet is released. X Engine oil General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 l of oil per 1,000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed at a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly: wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. Rthe X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch handle ; up and lift the bonnet. If you lift the bonnet by approximately 40 cm, the bonnet is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut. Closing the bonnet G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the bonnet. Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X Z Maintenance and care Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover the radiator. Do not use thermal mats, insect protection covers or anything similar. Doing so can cause the Onboard Diagnostics System to display inaccurate values. Some of these values are legally required and must always be correct. Engine compartment 298 Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. Maintenance and care ! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Example: vehicles with a petrol engine Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rchanging the engine oil and oil filter after missing the change interval required by the service system Rusing engine oil additives ! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. Example: vehicles with a diesel engine Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.0 litre of engine oil. X Adding engine oil G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hot engine parts. Example: engine oil filler cap X X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. Top up the engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.0 litre of engine oil. Engine compartment For further information on engine oil, see (Y page 363). Other service products Checking the coolant level G WARNING The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore, only unscrew the cap once the engine has cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge must display less than 70 † . Otherwise, you could be scalded if hot coolant escapes. Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cm above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X If necessary, top up with coolant that has been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. X For further information on coolant, see (Y page 365). Topping up the windscreen washer system/headlamp cleaning system G WARNING Windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze is highly flammable. Avoid spilling windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze on hot engine components as it can ignite and burn. Severe burns could be the result. Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level if the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 141). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 141). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 70 †. X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 141) in the ignition lock. X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Top up with the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. X X Z Maintenance and care Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Make sure that the cap locks securely into place. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 298). X 299 300 Service The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the windscreen washer system and the headlamp cleaning system. Further information on windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 366). Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or Service X Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS Service messages The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see separate Service Booklet). You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 297). The multifunction display shows a service message for a few seconds, e.g.: Next service A in .. days Service A due Service A overdue by ... days The letter indicates which service is due. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter. This figure indicates any necessary additional maintenance work to be performed. If you notify a qualified specialist workshop of this display, you will receive a statement on the associated costs. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Hiding a service message X Press the % or a button on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages Switch the ignition on. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm with a. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X X Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Care Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. The Service Hotline's current telephone numbers for use when you are abroad are to be found in the "Mercedes-Benz Service24h" section of the Service Booklet. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork Automatic car wash G WARNING Care Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For this reason, following a car wash, drive with particular care until the brakes are dry. General notes G WARNING H Environmental note The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, deactivate the HOLD function and DISTRONIC PLUS before the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash. Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are closed completely. blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off (OFF button is depressed). Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at position 0. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Rthe ! In car washes with a towing mechanism, make sure that the automatic transmission is in transmission position N, otherwise the vehicle could be damaged. Z Maintenance and care Special service requirements Arduous operating conditions or increased loads on the vehicle will require some service work to be performed more often than for a vehicle in normal use. Such arduous conditions include regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops and use in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces. For example, if the vehicle is used under arduous operating conditions, have air filters, engine oil and oil filters changed frequently and check the wheels often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 301 302 Care Maintenance and care RVehicles with a key: do not remove the key from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. You can prevent this by shifting the automatic transmission to N beforehand. RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: do not open the driver's door or frontpassenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N: X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. X Turn the key to position 2(Y page 141) in the ignition lock. Use the key instead of the Start/Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. High-pressure cleaning equipment G WARNING Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could otherwise damage the tyres and cause an accident. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the highpressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Relectrical Care Rtrim elements Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. Care and treatment of matt paintwork ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork shiny. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matt effect: RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials. RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matt finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matt finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels with a clear matt finish. i The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning vehicle parts Cleaning the wheels ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Z Maintenance and care Rseals 303 Care 304 Cleaning the windows G WARNING Maintenance and care Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove the key from the ignition lock before cleaning the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have gone off. The windscreen wipers could otherwise move and injure you. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly. Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition. X Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the wiper blades G WARNING Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove the key from the ignition lock before cleaning the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have gone off. The windscreen wipers could otherwise move and injure you. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Mirror turn signal ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pressure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Care 305 pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care product tested and approved by MercedesBenz. Interior care ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Rabrasive X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the reversing camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a highpressure cleaner. Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfibre cloth and TFT/ LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre cloth. X Cleaning Night View Assist Plus ! Never clean the camera lens. When cleanX Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. ing the field of vision of the driving systems, make sure that you do not spray glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with alka- line-based cleaning agents, such as wheel cleaner. Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust Z Maintenance and care Cleaning the display Care 306 plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change colour temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. Maintenance and care X X Fold down the camera cover by recess :. Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning wooden trim and trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents X Use a soft cloth to clean the windscreen in front of camera ;. Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING When cleaning the steering wheel boss and dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning agents containing solvents cause the surface to become porous, and as a result plastic parts may break away and be thrown around the interior when an airbag is deployed, which may result in severe injuries. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come in contact with the such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. Wipe the wooden trim and trim elements with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Cleaning the seat covers ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. Only use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1 % detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Care 307 Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth Maintenance and care moistened with a solution containing 1 % detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub carefully, and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen- uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. i Note that regular care is essential to make sure that the appearance and comfort of the covers are retained over time. Cleaning the seat belts ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 80 † or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Cleaning the roof lining and carpets Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Z 308 309 310 310 312 316 319 320 324 Breakdown assistance Useful information ............................ Where will I find...? ........................... Flat tyre ............................................. Battery (vehicle) ................................ Jump-starting .................................... Towing and tow-starting .................. Electrical fuses ................................. Where will I find...? 310 Useful information Setting up the warning triangle i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Breakdown assistance ist workshops: (Y page 23). : Press-stud ; Reflectors Where will I find...? Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle = Feet X X Fold feet = down and out to the side. Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using upper press-stud :. First-aid kit X X Open the boot lid. Turn catch 90° in the direction of the arrow and remove warning triangle :. Open the boot lid. Slide the stowage net down. X Open the stowage compartment. X Loosen tensioning strap :. X Remove first-aid kit ;. X X i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace any missing items. Where will I find...? Necessary wheel-changing tools can include, for example: Fire extinguisher ! Keep the stowage compartment closed Rjack while the vehicle is in motion. It may otherwise be damaged. Pull handle : upward and fold cover ; forward. X Remove the fire extinguisher from the stowage compartment. Rwheel Rwheel chock wrench Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit X i Have fire extinguisher ; refilled after each use and checked every one to two years. It may otherwise fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. : Towing eye ; Tyre sealant filler bottle = Tyre inflation compressor ? Fuse allocation chart X X Open the boot lid. Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 278). Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel Vehicle tool kit General notes The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the boot floor. i Apart from certain country-specific varia- tions, vehicles are not equipped with a tyrechange tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. : Vehicle tool kit tray ; Stowage tray = "Minispare" emergency spare wheel Open the boot lid. X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 278). X Breakdown assistance The fire extinguisher is located in the stowage compartment underneath the driver's seat. 311 Flat tyre 312 The vehicle tool kit contains: Your vehicle may be equipped with: RFoldable RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char- RFuse wheel chock allocation chart RJack RCentring pin pair of gloves RWheel wrench RTowing eye ROne Breakdown assistance Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel (AMG vehicles) : Towing eye ; One pair of gloves = Jack ? Folding wheel chock A Centring pin B Sheet for faulty wheel C Tyre inflation compressor D Wheel wrench E Fuse allocation chart X X Open the boot lid. Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 278). Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle Information on changing a wheel/fitting (Y page 336). Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tyres. acteristics) (Y page 313) TIREFIT kit (Y page 313) Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain countries) (Y page 351) X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Apply the parking brake. X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "normal" level is selected (Y page 181). X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics have status 0, which is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 141). X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X Place the warning triangle a suitable distance away (Y page 310). Observe legal requirements. Ra Flat tyre G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. Rthe vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The faulty tyre must be replaced. Rthere With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or with an active tyre pressure monitor. The maximum driving distance is approximately 80 km when the vehicle is partially laden, and approximately 30 km when the vehicle is fully laden. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: Rspeed Rroad condition temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/manoeuvres, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tyre pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. i When replacing one or all tyres, make sure that you only use tyres marked "MOExtended". Make sure that you only use the size of tyre specified for the vehicle. TIREFIT kit Using the TIREFIT kit TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò20 †. G WARNING In the following situations, the tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre. There is a risk of accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. Routside Z Breakdown assistance MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) 313 Flat tyre 314 If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, observe the following: Breakdown assistance RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out of the housing. X Screw hose A onto flange B of tyre sealant bottle :. X Place tyre sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tyre inflation compressor. X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X TIREFIT sticker, 2-part Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the boot floor (Y page 311). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket (Y page 283) in your vehicle. Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 283). X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 141). X Press on/off switch = on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). X Flat tyre X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for five minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi) has been attained after five minutes: (Y page 315). If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes: (Y page 315). Tyre pressure reached G WARNING A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. i If the tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. Tyre pressure not reached If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved after five minutes: Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 10 m. X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of five minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi). X X G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes: Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Pull away immediately. The maximum speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X X G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can signifZ Breakdown assistance Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase. 315 Battery (vehicle) 316 icantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (see the fuel filler flap for values). X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor. Breakdown assistance X i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker with the Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Work on the battery, e.g. removing or installing, requires specialist knowledge and the use of special tools. Therefore, always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING X To reduce the tyre pressure: depress pressure release button E next to pressure gauge F. If the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the repaired tyre. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the repaired tyre. X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit and damage your vehicle's electronic system. This can disrupt driving safety systems such as ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock during braking. This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and the braking distance may increase. There is a risk of accident. RIf ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be stabilised if it starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery (vehicle) Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual. G WARNING For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. To prevent acid burns, observe the following safety notes when handling batteries: Rdo not lean over the battery. Rdo not place any metal objects on a battery. Otherwise, you could cause a short circuit and the battery's gas mixture could ignite. Rmake sure that you do not create an electrostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics. Therefore, you should not pull or slide the battery over carpets or other synthetic materials. Rnever touch the battery first. To discharge a possible electrostatic charge, step out of the vehicle first and touch the bodywork. Rdo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The battery may explode as a result of electrostatic charge or due to flying sparks. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Service Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that: Ryou switch off the engine and remove the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Z Breakdown assistance Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. 317 318 Battery (vehicle) Breakdown assistance Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Rin vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be fitted securely during operation. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In such cases, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. i When you park the vehicle, remove the key if you do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. i After an interruption of the power supply, e.g. the battery was discharged, you have to: Rset the clock. Information on setting the clock can be found in the separate operating instructions. On vehicles with COMAND Online and a navigation system, the clock is set automatically. Rreset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 106). Charging the battery G WARNING Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated area. As the battery is being charged, gases can escape and generate minor explosions. This could injure you and other persons or cause damage to the paintwork or acid corrosion on the vehicle. You can obtain information on battery chargers which allow the battery to be charged while still installed from a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING There is a risk of acid burns during the charging process due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery during the charging process. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. ! Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery chargers allow the battery to be charged while still installed in the vehicle. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstart connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 319). Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. X Open the bonnet (Y page 296). X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 319). Jump-starting 319 Jump-starting G WARNING There is a risk of acid burns when jump-starting a vehicle due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery while the engine is being jump-started. G WARNING G WARNING Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. ! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter. Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. Rvehicles with a petrol engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. Rdo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. Rjump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. Ronly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. Rif the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. Rmake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: RThe jump leads are not damaged. RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump leads are connected to the battery. jump leads cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running. X Firmly depress the parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Open the bonnet (Y page 296). Rthe Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. Z Breakdown assistance Gases escaping from the battery during jump-starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery, and do not smoke. Comply with the important safety precautions when handling batteries. You will find these under "Battery (vehicle) - important safety notes" in the index. Towing and tow-starting Breakdown assistance 320 Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jump lead. Always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes. X X First, remove the jump leads from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive terminal ; and positive terminal =, each time beginning at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jump leads. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid towing bar if: Rthe engine is not running. is a brake system malfunction. Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system. The power assistance for the steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will need more force to steer and brake, you may have to depress the brake pedal with maximum force. Rthere Towing and tow-starting G WARNING The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be towed. ! Only secure the tow rope or towing bar to the towing eyes. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ! Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope: Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. tow rope must not be longer than is legally permitted. It should be marked in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm) so that other road users are aware that a vehicle is being towed. Rthe tow rope may only be attached to the towing eyes. Robserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Rthe ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! To tow vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. The automatic transmission may otherwise switch to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door which could damage the transmission. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 359). Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N i Deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 84). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Deactivate tow-away protection (Y page 71) before the vehicle is towed. Fitting/removing the towing eye Fitting the towing eye G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be Z Breakdown assistance Before towing away, make sure that the steering can be moved and is not locked. If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. 321 322 Towing and tow-starting particularly careful when removing the rear cover. Press the mark on cover ; inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Take cover ; off the opening. X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the stop and tighten it. X Removing the towing eye Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. Position the top of cover : in the bumper and press it in at the bottom until it engages. X Attach cover ; to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. X Breakdown assistance X Example: towing eye covers Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. Only possible on vehicles without 4MATIC. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 114). X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition lock. X When leaving the vehicle, take the key or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. Towing eye covers (AMG vehicles) The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear, under the covers. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 311). X Pull cover : out of the bumper in the direction of the arrow by inserting your fingers into the recess. When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 320). Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground G WARNING The power assistance for the steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will then need Towing and tow-starting It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 320). The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 141). X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 114). X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock. i When towing with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual to signal a change of direction. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When the combination switch is reset, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. X Transporting the vehicle ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle. X Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged. If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 319). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. The transmission may otherwise be damaged. Z Breakdown assistance much more effort to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. 323 Electrical fuses 324 You can find information on "Jump-starting" at (Y page 319). X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 141). or Electrical fuses Important safety notes Breakdown assistance G WARNING Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the systems concerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge faulty fuses. Using fuses which have not been approved or attempting to repair or bridge faulty fuses could cause the fuse to be overloaded and result in a fire. Have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop. X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 141). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel Rfuse box in the boot on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel the fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment under the boot floor (Y page 311). ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Before replacing a fuse Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Fuse box in the engine compartment G WARNING Make sure that the windscreen wipers are turned off and the key is pulled out of the ignition lock before you open the cover of the fuse box. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers and the wiper rods above the cover could be set in motion. This could lead to you or others being injured by the wiper rods. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. X Open the bonnet. X Electrical fuses To open: release cover : at the top right and left-hand sides with a flat object. X Open cover : downwards in the direction of the arrow. X To close: check whether the rubber seal is lying correctly in the cover. X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer. X Fold down cover and close clamps :. X Secure lines ; in the guides. X Close the bonnet. X Fuse box in the boot ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. X Open the boot lid. Z Breakdown assistance Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X To open: take lines ; from the guides. X Move aside lines ;. Route the lines behind connection = to do this. X Open clamps :. X Remove the fuse box cover forwards. X 325 326 327 328 328 328 330 331 336 341 351 Wheels and tyres Useful information ............................ Important safety notes .................... Operation ........................................... Winter operation ............................... Tyre pressure .................................... Changing a wheel ............................. Wheel and tyre combinations .......... Emergency spare wheel ................... 328 Operation Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 23). Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations recommendations Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tyres for your vehicle can be found under "Wheel/tyre combinations" (Y page 341). Information on air pressure for the tyres on your vehicle can be found: Rfactory Ron Important safety notes Wheels and tyres G WARNING If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part (designation, manufacturer, model). G WARNING A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tyres without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tyre. Rimmediately replace the flat tyre with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tyres with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. the tyre pressure label on the fuel filler flap (Y page 157) Runder "Tyre pressure" (Y page 331) Rin the "Tyre pressure" section Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of wheel spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle. i Further information on wheels and tyres can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Operation Information on driving Check the tyre pressures when the vehicle is heavily laden and, if necessary, adjust. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or Operation Regular checking of wheels and tyres G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. Regularly check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tyres Rpunctures Rtears in the tyres Rbulges on tyres Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 329). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not fit any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary (Y page 331). Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 351). The service life of tyres depends on various factors, including the following: Rdriving style pressure Rtyre mileage Rtyre Tyre tread G WARNING Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. Minimum tyre tread depth for: Rsummer tyres: 3 mm tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tyre tread depth is reached.. RM+S Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth. This otherwise significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. Z Wheels and tyres other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged. 329 330 Winter operation Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 351). MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) Wheels and tyres With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or with an active tyre pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres with a flat tyre (Y page 313). i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 336). Driving with summer tyres At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. M+S tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tyres have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have fitted. If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the vehicle, affix a corresponding warning label in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Under these circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it does not exceed the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres (Y page 170). When you have fitted the M+S tyres: Check the tyre pressures (Y page 331). Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 333). X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 335). X X For more information on driving with an emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 351). Tyre pressure Snow chains Tyre pressure G WARNING Tyre pressure specifications G WARNING Tyres with too low or too high tyre pressure contain the following hazards: Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: heavily laden or when driven at high speeds. Rthe tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly, which can severely impair tyre traction. Rthe driving, steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. There is a risk of accident. Follow recommended tyre inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tyres including the spare wheel: Rsnow Rat Rnever Rfit fit snow chains on the front wheels snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. chains cannot be fitted to all wheeltyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyre combinations (Y page 341). Ronly use snow chains when the road surface is completely snow-covered. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to fit snow chains. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Ron vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been fitted (Y page 181). i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling away with snow chains fitted (Y page 66). This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). For more information on driving with an emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 351). least every two weeks the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. offroad driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Rif G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pressure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of accident. Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tyre valve. G WARNING If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre pressure that is too low may result in a tyre blow-out. There is a risk of accident. Z Wheels and tyres If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: 331 332 Tyre pressure RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Wheels and tyres Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. You will find a table of tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Operation with the emergency spare wheel(Y page 351). The table inside the fuel filler flap may state tyre pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may vary; for more information, please refer to the vehicle's registration documents. If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures stated on the tyre pressure information label apply for all tyres approved for this vehicle. pressure can be checked using the on-board computer. If possible, only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. The tyres are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1.6 km Depending on the ambient temperature, the speed at which you are driving and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure change by approximately 10 kPa per 10 † (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics and thus the driving safety (e.g. aquaplaning) Rcause i The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for that tyre size. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre Tyre pressure loss warning system Important safety notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning Tyre pressure Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure the wheels or tyres Rfitted new wheels or tyres X Before restarting, make sure that the tyre pressures are set properly on all four tyres for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tyre pressures can be found in the table on the fuel filler flap. The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the Rchanged correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 331). X Make sure that the key is in position 2(Y page 141) in the ignition lock. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: Press button a. The Tyre press. now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. X If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press button %. or When the Tyre press. now OK? message appears, press the 9 or : button to select Cancel. X Press the a button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Z Wheels and tyres message will appear in the multifunction display. The tyre pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 331). The tyre pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check your vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: 333 334 Tyre pressure Tyre pressure monitor Wheels and tyres Important safety notes It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation (Y page 331). Note that the correct tyre pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tyre pressure monitor after adjusting to the cold tyre pressure (Y page 335). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. This will ensure that a warning message will only appear if the tyre pressure drops significantly. The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 331). The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are fitted to all wheels. Information on tyre pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre is shown in the multifunction display. The tyre pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a filling station using a pressure gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking tyre pressure electronically Make sure that the key is in position 2(Y page 141) in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be displayed in the multifunction display. X If the vehicle was parked for longer than 20 minutes the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message is shown. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure monitor automatically recognises new wheels or new sensors. If a clear allocation of the tyre pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre pressure monitor active message is shown instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. i If an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system may continue to show the tyre pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Tyre pressure If the tyre pressure monitor detects a significant pressure loss on one or more tyres, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds and the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Each tyre that is affected by a significant loss of pressure is highlighted in the pressure display. X If the Please correct tyre pressure message appears in the multifunction display, check the tyre pressure on all four wheels and correct it if necessary. i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are interchanged, the tyre pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tyre pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tyre pressure for each tyre or the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message. X Press the : button. The multifunction display shows the Use current pressure values as new ref‐ erence values message. X If you wish to confirm the restart: X Restarting the tyre pressure monitor When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tyre pressure monitor then monitors the new tyre pressure values. X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 331). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Press the a button. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor In certain countries, a radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor may be required. The radio type approval number for the tyre pressure monitor can be found online at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung. Z Wheels and tyres Warning messages of the tyre pressure monitor 335 Wheels and tyres 336 Changing a wheel Country Radio type approval number Brazil 1489-10-4415 Dubai TRA, Registered NO 0016161/08 TRA, Registered NO 0016162/08 Morocco MR5527 ANRT 2010/ 27. April 2010 MR5526 ANRT 2010/ 27. April 2010 Philippines ESD-1105558C Singapore Compliance with IDA Standard N0140-09 South Africa TA-2008/1068 TA-2008/1069 Changing a wheel Flat tyre You can find information on what to do in the event of a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 312). You will also find information on driving with MOExtended tyres in the event of a flat tyre. You can find information on what to do in the event of a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 312). You will also find information on driving with MOExtended tyres in the event of a flat tyre. Interchanging the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Interchange front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components. Only have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Interchanging the front and rear wheels of differing dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 337). The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ, depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels every 5000km to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear. Maintain the direction of tyre rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor. Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. Changing a wheel Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tyre-change tool kit from the vehicle. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. X i Apart from certain country-specific varia- tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary wheel-changing tools can include, for example: Rjack Rwheel Rwheel Fitting a wheel Preparing the vehicle Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the parking brake. X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "normal" level is selected (Y page 181). X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics have status 0, which is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 141). chock wrench Wheels and tyres Storing wheels 337 Securing the vehicle against rolling away X If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit (Y page 311). The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. Z Changing a wheel 338 The following must be observed when raising the vehicle: Rto Securing the vehicle on level ground Wheels and tyres X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients X On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the jack is used incorrectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Never disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted height. Rmake sure that the distance between the underside of the tyres and the ground does not exceed 3 cm. Rnever place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle. Rnever lie under the raised vehicle. Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Rnever open or close a door or the boot lid when the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Changing a wheel Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Example X Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned vertically under the jacking point. Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn crank ? until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off the ground. X Removing a wheel ! AMG vehicles: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and get a second person to assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second centring pin. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. X Position jack = at jacking point ;. Z Wheels and tyres X 339 Changing a wheel 340 Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw centring pin : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel. X Fitting a new wheel Wheels and tyres G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notices in "Changing a wheel" (Y page 336). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! AMG vehicle with ceramic brake discs: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and have a second person assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second centring pin. Positioning a wheel (example: vehicle with emergency spare wheel) Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the centring pin and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. X Unscrew the centring pin. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. X Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel: inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel (Y page 352). Only then lower the vehicle. X Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. ! Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel: Inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel using the tyre inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The rim could otherwise be damaged. Wheel and tyre combinations 341 These are specially adapted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP® and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) Tightening wheel bolts (example: vehicle with emergency spare wheel) Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The tightening torque must be 130 Nm. X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the boot again. X Check the air pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust accordingly. Observe the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 331). X i Vehicles with tire pressure control system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. Wheel and tyre combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. tain AMG tyres) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension variations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Further information about wheels, tyres and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. ! Large wheels: the lower the section width for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort are reduced and the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a result of driving over obstacles increases. Z Wheels and tyres RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- 342 Wheel and tyre combinations Overview of abbreviations used in the following tyre tables: RBA: both axles front axle RRA: rear axle You will find a table with recommended tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. For further information on tyre pressure, see (Y page 331). Check tyre pressures regularly and only when the tyres are cold. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the vehicle: RFA: Wheels and tyres Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle (left/right) Rwith the same type of tyres at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be mounted at the factory in all countries. Wheel and tyre combinations 343 Tyres CLS 250 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Summer tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 30 BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL MOExtended2 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 30 BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL MOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL FA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Wheels and tyres R 18 R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL4 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 All-weather tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 4 Observe the notes on "large wheels" in "Wheel/tyre combinations" under "General notes". 2 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 344 Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 30 BA: 245/45 R17 99 V M+SiMOExtended2 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 30 BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 Wheels and tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R19 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 V M+SiMOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 CLS 350 BlueEFFICIENCY Summer tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL MOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL FA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 2 Wheel and tyre combinations 345 R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL4 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 All-weather tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 Wheels and tyres Winter tyres R 17 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R19 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 V M+SiMOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 CLS 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Summer tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 MOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 Observe the notes on "large wheels" in "Wheel/tyre combinations" under "General notes". Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 2 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 4 3 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 346 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL FA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Wheels and tyres R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL4 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 All-weather tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R19 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 V M+SiMOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 4 Observe the notes on "large wheels" in "Wheel/tyre combinations" under "General notes". 3 2 Wheel and tyre combinations 347 CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Summer tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL MOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL FA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Wheels and tyres R 18 R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels XL4 FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 All-weather tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 4 Observe the notes on "large wheels" in "Wheel/tyre combinations" under "General notes". 2 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 348 Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R19 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 V M+SiMOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 Wheels and tyres CLS 500 BlueEFFICIENCY Summer tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL FA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels XL4 FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 4 Observe the notes on "large wheels" in "Wheel/tyre combinations" under "General notes". 2 Wheel and tyre combinations 349 All-weather tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Winter tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R19 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 V M+SiMOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 CLS 500 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL FA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R 18 R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL4 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". Observe the notes on "large wheels" in "Wheel/tyre combinations" under "General notes". 2 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 3 4 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 350 All-weather tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Winter tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R19 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 V M+SiMOExtended2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 Wheels and tyres CLS 63 AMG Summer tyres R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL4 RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL3, 4 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47 Winter tyres R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si4 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si4 FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si4 BA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+Si3, 4 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". Observe the notes on "large wheels" in "Wheel/tyre combinations" under "General notes". 2 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 3 4 Important safety notes Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. G WARNING i When you are driving with the collapsible Emergency spare wheel The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fitting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. To prevent hazardous situations: RAdapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emergency spare wheel if the dimesions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel briefly if the dimesions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. not switch off ESP®. RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel in question replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Make sure that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre type are correct. RDo emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system/tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: after mounting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Removing the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel/collapsible emergency spare wheel Removing the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. Snow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels. General notes You should regularly check the pressure of all your tyres, including the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 331). The applicable value is found on the wheel or under "Technical data" (Y page 354). An emergency spare wheel may also be fitted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. The emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the boot floor. X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 278). X Turn stowage tray ; anti-clockwise and remove together with vehicle tool kit tray :. X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel =. Z 351 Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel Emergency spare wheel 352 Removing the collapsible emergency spare wheel (AMG vehicles) Screw the valve cap back on. X Remove the protective film from the vehicle tool kit and put it over the collapsible emergency spare wheel. X Stow the collapsible emergency spare wheel in the emergency spare wheel well under the boot. X Inflating the collapsible emergency spare wheel Wheels and tyres ! Inflate the collapsible emergency spare The emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the boot floor. X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 278). X Reach into cutout : in the tool holder and lift it up. X Remove collapsible emergency spare wheel ;. wheel using the tyre inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. For further information on changing and fitting a wheel, see (Y page 337). Stowing a used collapsible emergency spare wheel ! Only place the collapsible emergency spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehicle. Take the following steps to stow a used collapsible emergency spare wheel. It will not otherwise fit into the spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve. X Use the back of the valve cap to unscrew the valve insert from the valve and release the air. i Fully deflating the tyre may take a few minutes. X Screw the valve insert back into the valve. Mount the collapsible emergency spare wheel as described (Y page 336). The collapsible emergency spare wheel must be mounted before it is inflated. X Pull connector ? and the air hose out of the housing. X Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible emergency spare wheel. X Screw union nut : on the air hose onto the valve. X Make sure on/off switch A of the tyre inflation compressor is set to 0. X Emergency spare wheel Insert connector ? into the cigarette lighter socket or into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter (Y page 283). Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 283). X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 141). X Press on/off switch A on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure is shown on pressure gauge =. X Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure. The specified tyre pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel. X When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on/off switch A on the electric air pump to 0. The tyre inflation compressor is switched off. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X If the tyre pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release button ; until the correct tyre pressure has been reached. X Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from the valve. X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible emergency spare wheel valve again. X Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower section of the blower housing. X Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the vehicle. 353 Wheels and tyres X Z 354 Emergency spare wheel Technical data All vehicles (except AMG vehicles) "Minispare" emergency spare wheel Tyres Light-alloy wheels T 155/60 R18 107 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 4.5B x 18 H2 ET 36 AMG vehicles Wheels and tyres Collapsible emergency spare wheel Tyres Light-alloy wheels 175/50 – 19 97 P Tyre pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi) 6.5 B x 19 H2 ET 14 355 356 356 356 357 359 359 366 368 Technical data Useful information ............................ Information on technical data ......... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Vehicle electronics ........................... Identification plates ......................... Service products and capacities ..... Vehicle data ...................................... 24 GHz radar sensor system (country overview) ..................................... 356 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 23). H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rdashboard Rinstrument cluster Rcentre console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. Rdoor Information on technical data You can find current technical data on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com Technical data i The technical data was determined in accordance with EC Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts G WARNING Driving safety may be impaired if nonapproved parts, tyres and wheels or safetyrelevant accessories are used. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for the use of parts that have been independently or officially approved. In Germany, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. This also applies to some other countries. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. Vehicle electronics This is the case: G WARNING Rif Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can lead to increased electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle interior. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. Have aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics G WARNING Always have work on the engine electronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehicle's operating safety could be affected. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. maximum permissible output in these wavebands must be complied with. Rthe approved aerial positions must be complied with. Rthe Technical data they cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted Rif other road users could be endangered Rif the emission or noise levels are adversely affected. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (Y page 359) and the engine number (Y page 359) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. ! Only have work carried out on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors and connector leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) Approved aerial positions : Front roof area G WARNING ; Rear roof area Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can cause the vehicle electronics to malfunction. The vehicle's operating safety and thus your own safety are impaired. Have aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment installed at a qualified specialist workshop. 357 = Rear wing ? Boot lid Z 358 Vehicle electronics The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: Waveband approved aerial positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear wing ? Boot lid Technical data i When fitting an aerial on the front roof area of vehicles with a sliding sunroof, observe the sweeping range of the roof. On the rear wing, it is recommended to position the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road. Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fitting aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) transmitters. Comply with the legal requirements for add-on parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or aerial positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Maximum transmission output (PEAK) Short wave (f < 54 MHz) 100 W 4 m waveband 30 W 2 m waveband 50 W trunked radio/Tetra 35 W 70 cm waveband 35 W GSM/DCS/PCS 850/900/1800/1900 10 W UMTS/LTE 10 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW Rmobile phones (GSM/DCS/PCS/UMTS/ LTE) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: Rtrunked radio/Tetra cm waveband RGSM/DCS/PCS RUMTS/LTE R70 Service products and capacities Identification plates 359 VIN Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. You will see VIN ;. X X Open the front right-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 359). The engine number is stamped onto the crankcase. You can obtain further information from any qualified specialist workshop. Example: vehicle identification plate : Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG) = EU type approval number (only for certain ? A B C D countries) VIN Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg) Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle, and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate. Service products and capacities Important safety notes G WARNING When handling, storing and disposing of any service products, please observe the relevant regulations, as you could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Keep service products away from children. To protect your health, do not allow service products to come into contact with your eyes or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if any service product is swallowed. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. Z Technical data Engine number 360 Service products and capacities Service products include the following: Tank capacity Rfuels The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. (e.g. petrol, diesel) Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid Rclimate control system refrigerant Components and service products must be matched. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use products tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appropriate section. You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Further information can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Technical data RMB Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Avoid contact with fuels. It is hazardous to your health if your skin comes into direct contact with fuels or you breathe in fuel vapours. Model Total capacity CLS 250 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY 59.0 l or 80.0 l All other models (except CLS 63 AMG) 80.0 l CLS 63 AMG 66.0 l or 80.0 l Model Of which reserve: Models with 59.0 l total capacity Approximately 8.0 l Models with 80.0 l total capacity Approximately 9.0 l CLS 63 AMG Approx. 14.0 l Petrol (EN 228, E DIN 51626-1) Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Even a small quantity of diesel will damage the fuel injection system. ! Only refuel using unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON/85 MON that conforms to European standard EN 228 or E DIN 51626-1 or an equivalent specification. Fuel with this specification may contain up to 10 % ethanol. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (petrol with 85 % ethanol) (100 % ethanol) RM15 (petrol with 15 % methanol) RE100 Service products and capacities (petrol with 85 % methanol) (100 % methanol) RPetrol with metallic additives RDiesel Do not mix these fuels with petrol, and do not use any additives. This can otherwise lead to engine damage. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Only cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz should be added to petrol, see "Additives". You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RM100 Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. i E10 fuel contains up to 10 % bioethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. i If the recommended fuel is not available, but only as a temporary measure, you may also use unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle. Information on refuelling (Y page 157). AMG vehicles ! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol with at least 98 RON/88 MON that conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. ! Premium-grade unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 95 RON/85 MON may be used as a temporary measure if the recommended fuel is not available. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. As much as possible, avoid driving at full throttle. ! Regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON may also be used as a temporary measure if the recommended fuel is not available. Doing so results in noticeably higher fuel consumption, and the engine power output is noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at full throttle. If only regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON or lower is available, you must have the vehicle adapted to this fuel at a qualified specialist workshop. i E10 fuel contains up to 10 % bioethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. CLS 350 BlueEFFICIENCY ! Only refuel using premium-grade sulphurfree unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON/ 85 MON that conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the emission control system. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Additives ! Do not refuel with low grade fuel and do not use fuel additives that have not been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Otherwise the fuel system could malfunction or be damaged. One of the major problems with low-grade fuel is the creation of carbon deposits during the process of burning fuel. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. If you use fuels without these additives for a longer period of time, there may be a build-up Z Technical data RM85 361 362 Service products and capacities of carbon deposits. These will form especially on the inlet valves and in the combustion chamber. This could lead to engine running problems, e.g.: Technical data Rlonger engine warm-up phase Runeven idle Rengine noise Rmisfiring Rloss of power In areas where petrol with the required additives is not available, carbon deposits can build up. In this case, Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of additives that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles; see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254510). You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to view a list of approved products. Observe the instructions for use in the product description. Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. This causes unnecessary costs and could damage the engine. Diesel (EN 590) Fuel grade G WARNING Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not mix diesel with petrol. This would result in damage to the fuel system and engine, which could lead to a vehicle fire. ! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that conforms to the European standard EN 590 or is of equivalent quality. Fuel that does not conform to EN 590 can lead to increased wear as well as damage to the engine and exhaust system. ! Do not use the following: Rmarine diesel oil Rbio-diesel Rvegetable oil Rpetrol Rparaffin Rkerosene Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do not use any special additives. This can otherwise lead to engine damage. This does not include flow improver additives. For further information, see "Flow improvers". Rheating ! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter: in countries outside the EU, only refuel with low-sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur content under 50 ppm; otherwise the emission control system could be damaged. ! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- ter: in countries where only diesel fuel with a high sulphur content is available, you will need to carry out your vehicle's oil change at shorter intervals. More information about the interval for oil change can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. Information on refuelling (Y page 157). Low outside temperatures In winter months, diesel fuel with an improved cold flow quality is available. In Europe, the EN 590 standard defines various climatedependent temperature categories. Malfunctions can be avoided by refuelling with diesel fuel that corresponds to the climatic specifications outlined in EN 590. At unusually low Service products and capacities i Further information on country-specific fuel properties can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at filling stations. Flow improvers To improve the low-temperature resistance of diesel fuel, a flow improver can be attached. The effectiveness of a flow improver is not guaranteed for every fuel. Only use flow improvers tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. During use, please observe the information on operation. Correct dosage and sufficient mixing are decisive in improving low-temperature resistance with the flow improver. Overdosage can potentially even decrease low-temperature resistance and must therefore be avoided. Follow the manufacturer's guidelines on dosage. Mix the additive into the diesel in good time, before the flow characteristics of the diesel become insufficient. Otherwise, malfunctions can arise through heating the fuel system, e.g. through parking in a heated garage. More information about recommended flow improvers can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Fuel consumption information H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences or road conditions You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat very low outside temperatures urban traffic Ron short journeys Rin mountainous terrain Rin i Only for certain countries: you can find the current consumption and emission values of your vehicle in the COC documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. The consumption figures were in each case based on the currently applicable version: Rfor vehicles that comply with standards up to and including the EURO 4 standard, in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC Rfor vehicles that comply with or exceed the EURO 5 standard, in accordance with Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007 Deviations from these values may occur under normal operating conditions. Engine oil General notes The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the function and service life of an engine. After extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves engine oils that correspond to the current technical standard. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. MercedesBenz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz approval is indicaZ Technical data outside temperatures, it is possible that the flow characteristics of the diesel fuel could be insufficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel from warmer areas may not be suitable for operation in colder climatic conditions. 363 364 Service products and capacities Technical data ted on the oil container by the inscription "MB Approval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB Approval 229.51. You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the Internet at: http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Petrol engines MB Approval CLS 350 BlueEFFICIENCY 229.3, 229.5 CLS 500 BlueEFFICIENCY CLS 500 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY CLS 63 AMG 229.5 Diesel engines with diesel particle filter MB Approval CLS 250 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY CLS 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY 228.51, 229.31, 229.51 Capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Model Replacement amount CLS 250 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY CLS 350 BlueEFFICIENCY 6.5 l CLS 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY CLS 500 BlueEFFICIENCY CLS 500 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY 8.0 l CLS 63 AMG 8.5 l Additives ! Do not use any additives with the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Engine oil viscosity Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for AMG vehicles. i If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add the following engine oils until the next oil change: Rvehicles with a petrol engine: MB Approval 229.1 229.3 or ACEA A3 Rdiesel engines: MB Approval 229.1, 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3 Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for AMG vehicles. This may only be topped up once, and the quantity must not be greater than 1.0 l. Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity rating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity, the faster it flows. Engine oil selection is based on the respective outside temperatures and in accordance with the SAE classification (viscosity). The table Service products and capacities Brake fluid G WARNING Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air; This lowers its boiling point. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when driving downhill). This impairs braking efficiency. You should have the brake fluid renewed at regular intervals. The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. ! The engine cooling system is filled with coolant, which must be renewed after 15 years or after 250,000 kilometres at the latest. The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Ranti-corrosion protection protection Rraising the boiling point If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation will be approximately 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rantifreeze Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING Antifreeze is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling antifreeze. If antifreeze comes into contact with hot engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn yourself. Do not spill any antifreeze on hot engine parts. cooling system against freezing down to approximately -37 †. Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be dissipated as effectively. If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. Z Technical data shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature properties of engine oils can be significantly impaired during operation due to, for example, ageing or soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore strongly recommended to observe regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. 365 Vehicle data 366 The coolant is checked at every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. At temperatures below freezing: Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperature. X RDown Windscreen and headlamp cleaning system Important safety notes G WARNING Windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze is highly flammable. Avoid spilling windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze on hot engine components as it can ignite and burn. Severe burns could be the result. Technical data ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. ! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the spraying nozzles could become blocked. At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. to Ò10 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit with 2 parts water. RDown to Ò20 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit with 1 part water. RDown to Ò29 †: mix 2 parts MB WinterFit with 1 part water. i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tyres - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Ritems of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. The unladen weight is specified in accordance with EC directive and includes: - driver (68 kg) - luggage (7 kg) - all fluids (fuel tank 90% full) Rvehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 359). Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. Vehicle data Dimensions and weights 367 CLS 500 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle height 1404 mm Unladen weight 1940 kg CLS 250 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY 1416 mm Unladen weight 1785 kg :Opening height (all models) 1772 mm – 1788 mm (all models) CLS 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle height 1416 mm Unladen weight 1815 kg Vehicle length (ECE) 4940 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2075 mm CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1881 mm Vehicle height 1416 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm Unladen weight 1875 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg CLS 63 AMG Maximum boot load 100 kg Vehicle length (ECE) 4987 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2075 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1881 mm Vehicle height 1411 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm CLS 350 BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle height 1416 mm Unladen weight 1735 kg CLS 500 BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle height 1404 mm Unladen weight 1870 kg Unladen weight 1890 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg Z Technical data Model Vehicle height 368 24 GHz radar sensor system (country overview) 24 GHz radar sensor system (country overview) The 24 GHz radar sensor system requires separate approval for each country. If you are driving in a country in which the radar sensor system is not approved, you must deactivate the system using the on-board computer (Y page 225). The current country overview can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung. Vehicles with a navigation system: the radar sensor system is deactivated automatically near radio telescope facilities. A display message appears in the multifunction display to tell you that the radar sensor system is being switched off (Y page 245). The currently active systems are automatically deactivated: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 170) Spot Assist (Y page 197) RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 201) RBAS PLUS (Y page 64) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 68) If deactivation does not occur automatically, you must deactivate the radar sensor system using the on-board computer (Y page 225). Vehicles without navigation and vehicles for Australia: you must deactivate the radar sensor system using the on-board computer when you are near a radio telescope facility (Y page 225). Technical data RBlind

Mercedes - CLS 350 CDI - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2012

Get your hands on the complete Mercedes factory workshop software

Get notified when we add a new Mercedes350 Manual

We cover 60 Mercedes vehicles, were you looking for one of these?

Mercedes - SLK 230 - Workshop Manual - (2001)

Mercedes - E Class - Wiring Diagram - 2003 - 2003

Mercedes Benz Service Manual Library Model W201

Mercedes - 220 - Workshop Manual - 1994 - 1995

Mercedes Mercedes Sprinter Mercedes Sprinter 1995 2005 Workshop Manual Russian

Mercedes - CLK 320 - Workshop Manual - (1999)

Mercedes - Vito - Owners Manual - 1995 - 2002

Mercedes - 230 - Wiring Diagram - 1994 - 1994

Mercedes - 190 - Workshop Manual - (1986)

Mercedes - Auto - mercedes-benz-c-class-2015-kezelesi-utmutato-82147

Mercedes W124 ETM (Electrical Trobleshoot Manual) PDF

Mercedes - E 300 - Workshop Manual - 1998 - 1998

Mercedes - Vito - Owners Manual - (2007)

Mercedes Benz Werkstatt-Handbuch PKW-Typen ab 1968 Baureihe 108-113 Wartung, Einstellung und Montage

Mercedes - 560 SEC - Wiring Diagram - 1989 - 1989

Mercedes - E 320 Sedan - Workshop Manual - 1999 - 1999

Mercedes - Auto - mercedes-benz-s-class-2013-kezelesi-utmutato-82184

Mercedes Mercedes 190 Mercedes Benz 190_1981 1993_Workshop Manual All Models

Mercedes Mercedes Vito Mercedes Vito Workshop Manual Russian

Mercedes - Vito - Owners Manual - (2006)

Mercedes - Sprinter - Parts Catalogue - 2006 - 2006

ATSG Mercedes 722.1-722.2 Transaxle Service Manual PDF

Mercedes 722.3 and 722.4 Transmission Repair Manual

Mercedes Mercedes Vario Mercedes Vario 2006 Owners Manual Romanian

Mercedes - Viano - Owners Manual - (2005)

Mercedes - SL 280 - Owners Manual - 2011 - 2013

Mercedes Mercedes Vito Mercedes Vito 2005 Misc. Documents Wiring Diagram

Mercedes Mercedes Viano Mercedes Viano 2005 Misc Documents Wiring Diagram

Mercedes - 420 SEL - Wiring Diagram - 1986 - 1986

Mercedes - E 430 - Workshop Manual - 2010 - 2010

Mercedes - SL 500 - Workshop Manual - (1994)

Mercedes - Vario - Owners Manual - 1996 - 2013 (Romanian)

Mercedes - Viano - Owners Manual - (2006) (Romanian)

Mercedes - SL 380 - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2014

Mercedes Mercedes Citan Mercedes Citan 2015 Owners Manual

Mercedes 722.5 Transmission Repair Manual

Mercedes Mercedes 190 Mercedes 190 1985 1989 Workshop Manual

Mercedes - CL 500 - Workshop Manual - (2000)

Mercedes - 380 SEC - Wiring Diagram - 1982 - 1982

Mercedes - CLA 250 - Owners Manual - 2015 - 2015

Mercedes - 500SL - Workshop Manual - (1990)

Mercedes - 300E - Workshop Manual - (1990)

Barossa - Motorcycle - Barossa__Barossa_170_MAGNA_parts

Mercedes - S 500 - Workshop Manual - (1996)

Mercedes - Sprinter - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2012

Mercedes - CLK 320 - Parts Catalogue - 1998 - 2002

1974-1984--Mercedes Benz--240D--4 Cylinders 2.4L MFI Diesel SOHC--31226601

Mercedes - 216 - Workshop Manual - 2006 - 2006

Mercedes - E 230 - Workshop Manual - 2017 - 2017

Mercedes - E 550 - Workshop Manual - 2003 - 2009

Yamaha - Motorcycle - Yamaha_2001_YZ250_N_LC

Mercedes - Vito - Brochure - 2011 - 2011

Mercedes - C220 - Workshop Manual - 1996 - 1996 (2)

Mercedes Mercedes 560 Mercedes 560 1986 1991 Workshop Manual

Mercedes Mercedes 220 Mercedes 220 Workshop Manual

Mercedes Mercedes SL 380 Mercedes SL 380 1981 1985 Workshop Manual

1974-1984--Mercedes Benz--230--4 Cylinders 2.3L 1BL SOHC--31331801

Mercedes - E 320 - Brochure - 2015 - 2015

Mercedes - Auto - mercedes-benz-sl-2005-kezelesi-utmutato-82188

Mercedes - Vito - Owners Manual - 1996 - 1998 (Russian)